LG Electronics USA L601I GSM Camera Phone User Manual
LG Electronics USA GSM Camera Phone
Contents
- 1. Part 1
- 2. Part 2
- 3. Manual Part 1
- 4. Manual Part 2
Manual Part 1
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg1.png)
DoCoMo W-CDMA, GSM/GPRS system
Thank you for purchasing the “FOMA L601i”.
Before or during use of the FOMA L601i, make sure that you read this manual and the separate manuals such as for the battery pack
thoroughly so that you can use the FOMA L601i correctly. If you feel any inconvenience in reading the manual, contact the DoCoMo
Information Center listed on the back page of this manual.
The FOMA L601i is designed to be your close partner. Treat it carefully at all times to ensure long-term performance.
Before using your FOMA phone
Because the FOMA phones use radio waves, they cannot be used in places where radio waves do not reach, such as inside tunnels,
underground, or in buildings; or the outside where radio waves are weak or out of the FOMA service area. They may not be used in the
high-rise buildings even when the antennas are unobstructed. You may also experience interruption of calls even when using without
moving while the radio waves are strong enough for the three antennas to appear on the display.
Use the FOMA phone carefully to avoid disturbing other people when in public, or in crowded or quiet places.
Since the FOMA phones use radio waves as the medium of telecommunication, calls may be tapped by the third party. However, the W-
CDMA and GSM/GPRS systems automatically support tapping prevention, so your conversation will be incomprehensible to the third party.
The FOMA phones change your voice into digital signals and send them to the other party. In places where the radio waves are weak, the
digital signals may not be converted correctly, and in such a case, the voice heard may sound different from the actual original voice.
It is recommended that you make separate notes of the information stored in the FOMA phone and keep such notes in a safe place.
DoCoMo cannot be held responsible in any way for the loss of data stored in the phone.
The user hereby agrees that the user shall be solely responsible for the result of the use of SSL. Neither DoCoMo nor the certifier as listed
herein makes any representation and warranty as for the security in the use of SSL. In the event that the user shall sustain damage or loss
due to the use of SSL, neither DoCoMo nor the certifier shall be responsible for any such damage or loss.
Certifier: VeriSign Japan K.K. Betrusted Japan Co., Ltd. GeoTrust Japan, inc.
This FOMA phone can be used only via the FOMA network or Roaming service area by DoCoMo.
For those who use the FOMA phone for the first time
If this is the first time for you to use the FOMA phone, read this manual in the order as described below. Then you will get acquainted with the
outline of preparing and operating procedures for using your FOMA phone.
1. Attach and then charge the battery pack. >P37, P39
2. Turn the power to the FOMA phone ON, initialize, and confirm your phone number. >P43
3. Check the buttons on the FOMA phone for their roles. >P28
4. Confirm the meanings of icons that appear on the display. >P31
5. Learn how to operate the menus. >P34
6. Get well acquainted how to make and receive calls. >P46, P52
Note that “FOMA L601i” is referred to as “FOMA phone” in this manual.
The functions which use a miniSD memory card are described in this manual; however, you need to obtain a miniSD memory
card separately to make these functions available. See page 166 for the miniSD memory card.
It is prohibited to copy all or part of this manual without permission.
The instructions contained in this manual may be changed without notice.
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg2.png)
1
How to Read/Refer to This Manual
The search methods and page structure of this manual are described here. Screen displays and illustrations
described in this manual are for reference. The actual ones might differ.
How to Refer to This Manual
By the following search methods, you can find pages where your desired functions and explanations are described:
Tabs on Cover ]Cover
Search from the tabs printed on the cover.
]See the next page for more details.
Index ]P306
Search from keywords when you know the names of
functions or services.
Contents ]P4
Search from the contents that categorize functions.
Features ]P6
Search from Features when you want to use specific functions of FOMA L601i such as new functions and useful
functions.
Menu List ]P224
Search from list for menus of FOMA L601i.
Quick Manual ]P316
Quick Manual gives you a clear, brief description about fundamental functions. You can take it with you when you
go outing.
How to Read/Refer to This Manual
aOverseas Use
See “Overseas use” (P213) for how to use your FOMA phone outside Japan.
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg3.png)
2
How to Read/Refer to This Manual
aFrom the Tabs on the Cover
Search for the functions and explanations in the order of the Cover >First page of Chapter >Description page.
aFrom the Index
Search from the index when you know the names of functions or services.
Contents / Precautions
Confirming before use
Making Calls /
Receiving Calls
Making /
iving Video-phone Calls
Phonebook
Sound / Display
Settings
Safety settings
Multimedia
(Camera)
i-mode
Mail
i-appli
Data box
Adjusting the Ring Volume ....................68
Adjusting the Effect Tone Volume .........68
Selecting a Ring Tone ............................68
Selecting a Effect Tone..........................69
Setting a Vibrator ...................................70
Activating the Manner Mode .................70
Setting the Ringing Operation for
Incoming Mail .........................................71
Setting the Ringing Time........................72
Setting Sub Display................................73
Setting Fonts of Dial Characters ...........74
Setting Menu Display .............................75
Setting Backlight ....................................75
Setting Color Scheme ............................75
Sound /
Display
1 Ring volume
2 Effect tone volume
3 Select ringtone
4 Select effect tone
5 Vibration settings
6 Manner settings
7 Mail ring duration
Select
Sound
On the Stand-by display,
C[Menu] ]or “Sound”
To display the Sound menu
1 Main display
2 Sub display
3 Font
4 Menu style
5 Backlight
6 Color scheme
Select
Display
On the Standby display,
C[Menu] ]or “Display”
To display the Display menu
..125
..134
, 130
132,
..135
, 130
, 132
, 132
..126
..126
, 130
, 130
Folder list (Meody)..................150
Folder list (Moving/i-motion) ...150
Mail list (Received)..................129
Mail list (Sent).........................135
Mail list (Unsent).....................137
Software list ...........................149
Sound .........................................68
Effect tone volume ...................68
Mail ring on/off .........................72
Manner mode ..........................70
Ring volume.............................68
Ringing time.............................72
Selecting a effect tone .............69
Selecting a ring tone ................68
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg4.png)
3
How to Read/Refer to This Manual
How to use this manual
In this manual, operations of your FOMA phone are explained in the structure as shown below:
• Screen displays and illustrations described in this manual are for reference. The actual ones might differ.
Ti
t
l
e
Shows the title
Description of operations
Provides the operation
number and operation
method. > P34
Supplementary
description of functions
Shortcut operation
Shows button operation
from the Stand-by display.
Description of functions
Provides detailed
explanation of each
function.
Supplementary
description of functions
Index tab
Shows the chapter title.
These titles are described
in the tabs on the cover.
Screen
Shows the screen
displayed in the
process of or after
an operation.
Information
Gives necessary
information, notes,
and supplementary
explanation.
✽ The above page is a sample.
How to enter the menu
C#1
C
I
I
M
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg5.png)
4
Contents/Precautions
*You need to obtain a miniSD memory card separately to use the functions related to the miniSD memory card. >P166
Contents/Precautions
Contents
Before using your FOMA phone....................... Rear side of Front Cover
For those who use the FOMA phone
for the first time ........................................... Rear Side of Front Cover
How to Read/Refer to This Manual ...................................................... 1
Contents ............................................................................................. 4
Features of FOMA L601i...................................................................... 6
Making Full Use of FOMA L601i!.......................................................... 8
Safety Precautions (Always follow the safety precautions.)................. 10
Notes on Handling............................................................................. 20
Intellectual Property Rights ................................................................ 23
Accessories and Main Options .......................................................... 25
Confirming before use......................................... 27
• Phone Parts and Functions • Display • Menu Operations
• How to Use the Soft Keys • Main Side Button Operations
• Using the UIM (FOMA Card) • Attaching/Removing the Battery Pack
• Charging the FOMA Phone • Turning Power ON
• Turning Power OFF • Clock/Time
• Using Caller ID Notification Service • Own Number
Making Calls/Receiving Calls.............................. 45
• Making Calls • Receiving Calls • Using Public mode (power off)
Making/Receiving Video-phone Calls ................ 51
• About Video-phone • Making Video-phone Calls
• Receiving Video-phone Calls
• Changing Settings for Video-phone Calls
Phonebook........................................................... 57
• Adding to Phonebook • Searching for Phonebook Entries
• Checking the Number of Saved Phonebook Entries
• Setting Phonebook • Setting Groups
• Displaying Own Number
Sound/Display ..................................................... 67
• Adjusting the Ring Volume • Adjusting the Effect Tone Volume
• Setting a Ring Tone • Setting an Effect Tone
• Setting a Vibrator • Activating the Manner Mode
• Setting Ringing Operations for Incoming Mail
• Setting Ringing Time • Setting Main Screen
• Setting Sub Display • Setting Fonts of Dial Characters
• Setting Menu Style • Setting Backlight
• Setting color Scheme
Settings ................................................................ 77
• Call/Answer • Call Feature • Video Phone • Date & Time
• Network (for overseas use) • Changing a Host from i-mode
• Security • • Others Settings
Safety settings ..................................................... 95
• Passwords
• Preventing the Phone from Activating the Operation of Function
• Other Safety Settings
Multimedia (Camera) ........................................... 99
• Notes for when using the camera • Using the Camera
• Taking Still Images • Shooting Moving Images
i-mode ................................................................ 109
• i-mode Menu • What is i-mode? • Displaying the iMenu display
• Displaying Sites from Bookmark • Displaying Screen memo
• Displaying Last URL • Displaying Internet Web Pages
• Displaying MessageR/F
• Checking Whether Center Holds MessageR/F
• Setting Functions of i-mode • Displaying Sites
• How to See/Use Sites • Using My Menu
• Changing i-mode Password
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg6.png)
5
Contents/Precautions
Contents/Precautions
Mail..................................................................... 127
• Mail Menu • i-mode Mail • Displaying Mail in Inbox
• Displaying Mail in Outbox • Displaying Mail in Unsent message
• Composing Mail • Checking New i-mode mail and Message
• Receiving Selected Mail • Checking whether Center Holds SMS
• Changing Mail Settings
i-appli ................................................................. 147
• What is i-appli • Downloading i-appli from Sites • Starting i-appli
Data box............................................................. 153
• Introduction of Data box • Displaying/Managing/Editing Images
• Playing back/Managing/Editing Moving Images/i-motion
• Playing back/Managing/Editing Melody
• Caution on Use of the miniSD Memory Card
• Inserting/removing miniSD memory card
• Playing back/Editing Data on the miniSD Memory Card
• Playing back i-motion (including of music file) downloaded by other
devices in FOMA phone
Tools................................................................... 171
• Using Alarm • Setting the Custom Menu
• Using the Infrared Exchange Function • Using Calculator
• Using Unit Converter • Using World Time • Using Stop Watch
• Using the miniSD Memory Card
Stationery........................................................... 181
• Using Schedule • Using Memo
• Using Date Search • Using Date Counter
Network Service ................................................ 189
• Available Network Services • Using Voice Mail
• Using Call Waiting Service • Using Call Forwarding Service
• Using Nuisance Call Barring Service
• Using Caller ID Notification Service
• Using Caller ID Request Service • Using Set Arrival Act
• Selecting Arrival Call Act • Registering Additional Services
• Registering Additional Guidance • Using English Guidance
• Using Service Dialing Number • Using Call Barring
Data Transmission............................................. 199
• Data Transmission Available from the FOMA phone • Before Use
• Glossary of Data Transmission Terms
• Preparation Flow for Data Transmission • AT command
Entering Characters........................................... 205
• Entering Characters • List of Character Assignment of Dial Buttons
Overseas Use..................................................... 213
• Network Settings • International Roaming Service
• Using the FOMA Phone Overseas
Appendix............................................................ 223
• Menu list • Pre-installed data • List of Terms
• Symbol/Special Character List • Pictograph and Emoticon List
• Common Phrase List • Kuten Code List • List of city in World time
• Multiaccess Combination Patterns
• Multitask Combination Patterns
• Service Available with FOMA Phones
• Introduction of Data Link • Troubleshooting
• Error Messages • Introduction of Options and Related Equipment
• Warranty and Maintenance Services
• Specific Absorption Rate of the Mobile Phone
• Export/Re-export regulations of Japan and USA
Index/Quick Manual .......................................... 305
• Index • Quick Manual
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg7.png)
6
Contents/Precautions
*You need to obtain a miniSD memory card separately to use the functions related to the miniSD memory card. >P166
Contents/Precautions
Features of FOMA L601i
FOMA (Freedom Of Mobile multimedia Access) is the name of the DoCoMo service based on the W-CDMA format,
authorized as one of the world’s standards for third-generation mobile telecommunication systems (IMT-2000).
Main Futures
Video-phone >P52
You can have a conversation with the other party seeing
the face each other. You can also let the other party’s
voice heard from the speaker or the other party see the
landscape around you by rotating the camera.
Whole Range of Network Services
Voice Mail (Charged) >P190
Call Forwarding Service (Free) >P193
Call Waiting Service (Charged) >P192
SMS (Short Messages) (Monthly fee Free)
>P141
i-mode Function
Viewing sites >P120
This is on-line service to view the information via
connecting the site or homepage by operating the button
simply.
i-mode mail
>
P139
You can compose and send i-mode mail. Also, you can
attach images, moving images and melodies for sending.
i-motion >P125
You can obtain images and music from sites or Internet
web pages.
i-motion Mail >P139, P140
You can attach moving images shot by the camera or i-
motion movies obtained from sites or Internet web pages to
i-mode mail for sending.
i-appli >P148
You can download and use a variety of i-appli software
programs from sites.
For example, you can download and enjoy a variety of
games.
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg8.png)
7
Contents/Precautions
Contents/Precautions
International Roaming >P214
You can make/receive voice/video-phone calls, perform
i-mode communication, exchange i-mode mail and SMS
messages and perform data transmission with a
personal computer connected to your FOMA phone
abroad with the same phone number. Moreover,
subscribers of the Voice Mail or Call Forwarding Service
can use the network services.
Useful Functions for Overseas Use
Unit converter >P176
You can convert a value of currency, surface, length,
weight, temperature, volume or velocity from one unit
to another. You can use Unit converter in confirming a
price converted into yen when you shop overseas.
World time
>
P178
You can check the date and time of 58 cities in the
world. Also, a world map is displayed so that you can
confirm the locations of cities and the national flags. You
can use Global Clock in confirming the date and time
and the location of your next destination on a trip.
Dual clock display
>
P73
You can display the time of two cities on the Stand-by
display at the same time. For example, you can view the
time difference by setting the city of a stay place.
Using the Infrared Exchange
>
P174
You can exchange the data with FOMA handset via
Infrared.
To display a character in phonebook
>
P58
In a phonebook, you can set the image and the character
for each entry. You can make your own character by
changing “Face”, “Hair”, “Tops”, “Bottoms”, “Accessory”
and “Scenery”.
Camera Functions >P101, P106
You can shoot still images and moving images using the
rotatable camera (1,300,000 effective pixels and 1,300,000
recording pixels). You can shoot not only a person or
landscape but also yourself by rotating the camera.
You can use various functions such as adjusting images,
zooming images, special effects when you shoot images.
Compatible with miniSD Memory Card
>
P166, P179
You can save still images/moving images shot by the
camera or video camera of the L601i phone and melodies
by using a miniSD memory card (option). Saved data can
easily be exchanged between the L601i phone and a
personal computer. You can save the i-motion or music file
composed by external device in miniSD memory, and then
play them in FOMA phone. (You might not play the files if
the condition to play doesn't meet.)
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg9.png)
8
Contents/Precautions
Contents/Precautions
Making Full Use of FOMA L600i!
"Video-phone", communication seein
g
the face each other.
>
P
52
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bga.png)
9
Contents/Precautions
Contents/Precautions
Sim
p
le and Eas
y
Camera Function
>
P1
00
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bgb.png)
10
Contents/Precautions
Contents/Precautions
Safety Precautions
(Always follow the safety precautions.)
aBefore using the FOMA phone, read these
safety precautions carefully so that you can use
it correctly. After reading the precautions, keep
them in a safe place for later reference.
aBe sure to observe these safety precautions
because they are designed to protect you or
those around you from causing injury and to
avoid unnecessary damage to the property.
aThe symbols below indicate the levels of danger
or damage that can be caused if the particular
precautions are not observed.
aThe following symbols show specific directions:
a“Safety Precautions” are divided into the
following six sections:
General precautions for FOMA phone, batteries,
adapters/chargers, and UIM ............................... P11
Precautions for FOMA phone ............................. P13
Precautions for batteries ..................................... P15
Precautions for adapters/chargers ...................... P17
Precautions for UIM ............................................ P18
Notes on using near electronic
medical equipment.............................................. P19
This symbol indicates that incorrect
handling will almost certainly cause
death or serious injury.
This symbol indicates that incorrect
handling poses a risk of causing
death or serious injury.
This symbol indicates that incorrect
handling poses a risk of causing
injury or damage to the product or
property.
Danger
Warning
Caution
Denotes things not to do (Prohibition)
Don’t
Denotes not to disassemble.
Denotes not to touch with wet hands.
Denotes not to use where it could get wet.
Do not
disassemble
No wet
hands
Avoid
water
Denotes mandatory instructions (matters that
must be complied with).
Denotes to pull the power plug out of the
outlet.
Pull the power
plug out
Do
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bgc.png)
11
Contents/Precautions
Contents/Precautions
Next Page
General precautions for FOMA
phone, batteries, adapters/chargers,
and UIM
Danger
Use only the batteries and adapters /
chargers approved by DoCoMo for the
FOMA phone.
If you use any type of battery, adapter or charger
other than the specified one, the FOMA phone,
battery or other devices may leak, overheat, burst,
catch fire, or get damaged.
Battery Pack L01 FOMA AC Adapter 01
FOMA AC Adapter 01 for both overseas and
domestic usage FOMA DC Adapter 01
• For other specified products, contact a handling
counter such as a DoCoMo shop.
Do not disassemble, modify or solder the
FOMA phone or accessories.
Accidents such as fire, injury, electric shock, or
malfunction may result. The battery may leak,
overheat, bust or catch fire.
Do not use or leave the FOMA phone or
accessories in places where it is exposed
to direct sunlight, or in extremely high
temperatures such as inside a car in the
summer heat.
Otherwise, the devices may deform or malfunction,
battery may leak, overheat, burst, or catch fire, or
performance and longevity may deteriorate. Also, part
of the case might be heated, causing bare skin burns.
Do not let the FOMA phone or accessories
get wet.
If liquids such as water or pet urine get onto them,
overheating, electric shock, fire, malfunction, injuries
or others may result. Pay attention to the place of use
of the way of handling.
Warning
Do not use near places such as gas
stations where there is danger of fire or
explosion.
If used in dusty places or where there are flammable
gases such as propane or gasoline, explosions or fire
may result.
Don’t
Avoid
water
Don’t
Do not
disassemble
Do
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bgd.png)
12
Contents/Precautions
Contents/Precautions
Warning
Do not place the batteries, the FOMA
phone, adapters/chargers, or UIM in
microwave ovens or high-pressure
containers.
The battery may leak, overheat, burst, or catch fire.
The FOMA phone or the adapter/charger may
overheat, smoke, or catch fire, or its circuit parts may
burst.
Do not throw the FOMA phone or
accessories, or subject them to severe
shocks.
The battery may leak, overheat, burst, catch fire, or
cause damage to the equipment.
Be careful not to let electroconductive
materials (metal pieces, pencil leads, etc.)
contact with the charging terminal or
external connecting terminals. Also, make
sure that those are not entered into the
inside of the FOMA phone.
Short-circuit could cause catching fire or malfunction
of the FOMA phone.
If the FOMA phone or accessories begins
to emit an odor, overheat, discolor, deform,
etc., while being used, charged, or stored,
take the countermeasures as follows;
1. Pull the power plug off the outlet or socket.
2. Shut down the power to the FOMA phone.
3. Remove the battery pack from the FOMA phone.
If you use the devices with these symptoms not
handled, they may overheat, burst, or catch fire, or
the battery may leak.
Caution
If children use the FOMA phone or
accessories, a guardian should explain the
safety precautions and correct operations.
The guardian should also make sure that
the instructions are followed during use.
Otherwise, injury may result.
Do not place the FOMA phone or
accessories on unstable locations such as
wobbly tables or slanted locations.
The FOMA phone or accessories may fall, resulting in
injury or malfunction.
Keep out of the reach of babies and
infants.
Accidental swallowing or injury may result.
Do not store in humid or dusty places, or in
high temperature environments.
Malfunction may result.
Don’t
Do
Don’t
Do
Do
Don’t
Don’t
Don’t
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bge.png)
13
Contents/Precautions
Contents/Precautions
Next Page
Caution
Temperature of the FOMA phone, battery
pack or adapter /charger may rise if charging
the battery, shooting moving images, playing
back or using the video phone, i-mode or i-
appli repeatedly or continuously for a long
time.
Prolonged direct contact with a high temperature
part may cause redness, itching, rash, etc. on
skin depending on your physical conditions or
predisposition.
Be careful especially when using the FOMA
phone connected to the adapter / charger
continuously for a long time.
Precautions for FOMA phone
Warning
Turn off the FOMA phone in places where
use is prohibited such as in airplanes and
hospitals.
Otherwise, electronic devices and electronic medical
appliances may be adversely affected. If the Auto
Power ON function is set, deactivate the setting, then
turn the power off.
For use inside medical facilities, make sure that you
comply with their regulations.
You may be punished for using the FOMA
phone in airplanes, which is prohibited by law.
Turn off the FOMA phone when near high-
precision electronic devices or devices
using weak electronic signals.
The FOMA phone may possibly cause these devices
to malfunction.
Electronic devices that may be affected:
Hearing aids, implanted cardiac pacemakers,
implanted defibrillators, other medical electronic
devices, fire alarms, automatic doors and other
automatically controlled devices.
If you are using an implanted cardiac pacemaker,
implanted defibrillator or any other electronic
medical device, consult the manufacturer or
retailer of the device for advice regarding possible
effects from the radio waves.
If you have any implanted electronic
medical equipment, do not place your
FOMA phone in a chest pocket or inner
pocket.
If the FOMA phone is positioned close to electronic
medical equipment, it may cause that equipment to
malfunction.
Don’t
Do
Do
Do
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bgf.png)
14
Contents/Precautions
*You need to obtain a miniSD memory card separately to use the functions related to the miniSD memory card. >P166
Contents/Precautions
Warning
For those with weak heart conditions, the
vibrator and ring volume must be adjusted
carefully.
Those functions may cause an effect on the heart.
Do not operate the FOMA phone while
driving a vehicle.
Operating a mobile phone during driving has been
prohibited since November 1, 2004 according to the
revised Road Traffic Law. During driving, make sure
that you activate Public mode (power off) or the Voice
Mail Service.
Do not directly point the infrared data port
at someone’s eyes during transmission.
His/Her eyes may possibly be affected. Other
infrared devices may operate erroneously if the
infrared data port is pointed at them during
transmission.
When talking on the speaker phone, be
sure to keep the FOMA phone away from
your ear.
Otherwise, your hearing could be impaired.
Do not shine the light close to eyes.
Doing so can damage eyesight. Also, accidents such
as injury might occur if someone is startled or
dazzled by the light.
Do not put the FOMA phone in the place
where it could be affected by an expanded
airbag, etc., on the dashboard.
If the airbag expands, the FOMA phone could hit you
and others, causing accidents such as injury and the
FOMA phone could become damaged.
If thunder starts to rumble while you are
using the FOMA phone outdoors, turn the
power off, and move to a safe place.
Otherwise, you could be struck by lightning or suffer
an electric shock.
Caution
Do not swing the FOMA phone by its strap.
The FOMA phone may hit you or persons around
you, and accident such as injury or malfunction may
result.
Don’t
Do
Don’t
Don’t
Do
Don’t
Don’t
Do
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg10.png)
15
Contents/Precautions
Contents/Precautions
Next Page
Caution
Itching, rash or eczema may be caused
depending on your physical conditions or
predisposition. If an abnormality occurs,
stop using the FOMA phone immediately,
and then seek medical attention.
Metals are used for the following parts:
Do not allow liquids such as water, or
foreign materials such as metal pieces or
flammable materials to get into the UIM
insertion slit or miniSD memory card slot of
the FOMA phone.
Fire, electric shock or malfunction may occur.
Electronic devices in some types of cars
can be affected by use of the FOMA phone.
For safety’s sake, do not use the FOMA phone inside
such cars.
Do not place magnetic cards or similar
objects near the FOMA phone or between
phone parts.
Information on magnetic cards such as cash cards,
credit cards, telephone cards and floppy disks may
be deleted.
Be careful not to let your finger or the strap
get caught when you open and close the
FOMA phone.
Accidents such as injury or malfunction may result.
Precautions for batteries
aCheck the description on the label of the
battery pack for the type of battery.
Danger
If the battery fluid gets into your eyes, do not
rub them. Flush your eyes with clean water
and get medical attention immediately.
Otherwise, the loss of eyesight may result.
Do not throw the battery into fire.
The battery may leak, overheat, burst or catch fire.
Don’t
Do
Do
Don’t
Do
Don’t
Do
Description Type
Li-ion Lithium-ion battery
(Li-polymer) (Lithium-polymer battery)
Where it is used Material
Navigation Button Aluminum (coated)
Around the camera
Earpiece/Speaker and
their surrounding Chrome plating
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg11.png)
16
Contents/Precautions
Contents/Precautions
Danger
Do not let any metal such as a wire contact
the terminal. Also, do not carry or store the
battery together with a metal necklace.
The battery may leak, overheat, burst or catch fire.
Do not pierce it with nails, hit it with a
hammer, or step on it.
The battery may leak, overheat, burst or catch fire.
Do not use excessive force to attach the
battery to the FOMA phone when you
cannot attach it successfully. Also, check
that the battery is the right way round
when you attach it.
The battery may leak, overheat, burst or catch fire.
Warning
If the battery fluid comes in contact with
skin or clothes, immediately stop using,
then wash affected areas thoroughly with
clean water.
The battery fluid is harmful to skin.
If charging is not completed at the end of
the specified charging time, stop charging.
Otherwise, the battery may leak, overheat, burst or
catch fire.
If it leaks or emits an odor, immediately
stop using the battery and keep it away
from fire.
The battery fluid, being flammable, may catch fire and
cause an explosion.
Caution
An exhausted battery should not be
disposed of with other waste.
The battery may catch fire or destroy the environment.
After insulating the battery terminals with tape, bring
them to a handling counter such as a DoCoMo shop
or dispose of them in accordance with local waste
disposal regulations.
Don’t
Do
Do
Do
Don’t
Don’t
Don’t
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg12.png)
17
Contents/Precautions
Contents/Precautions
Next Page
Precautions for adapters/chargers
Warning
Never short-circuit the charging terminals
when the adapter is plugged into the
power outlet or cigarette lighter socket.
Also, never touch the charging terminals
with fingers or other bare skin.
Fire, malfunction, electric shock or injury may result.
Do not touch the power cord of the
adapter/charger, or power outlet with wet
hands.
Electric shock or injury may result.
Do not use the AC adapter in steamy
places such as a bathroom.
Electric shock may occur.
When the adapter/charger is not to be
used for a long period of time, unplug the
power cord from the outlet.
Otherwise, electric shock, fire, or malfunction may
result.
Do not use a damaged adapter/charger
cord or power cord.
Electric shock, overheating or fire may result.
If liquids such as water get in the charger,
unplug the power cord immediately from
the outlet or cigarette lighter socket.
Liquid inside the charger may cause electric shock,
smoke, or fire.
When plugging the AC adapter into the
power outlet, firmly plug it in, taking care
not to contact with metal straps or the like.
Otherwise, electric shock, short-circuit or fire may
result.
Use the adapter/charger at the specified
VAC.
Otherwise, fire or malfunction may result. When
using the FOMA phones overseas, use FOMA AC
Adapter 01 for both overseas and domestic usage.
AC adapter: 100 VAC
FOMA AC Adapter for both overseas and domestic
usage: 100 to 240 VAC
(Connect only to home AC outlet)
DC adapter: 12/24 VDC
(For negative (-) grounded vehicles only)
If a fuse of the DC adapter has blown,
replace it with a specified fuse.
Otherwise, catching fire or malfunction may result.
For the specified fuse, see the user’s manual.
Do
Do
Do
Pull the power
plug out
Don’t
Pull the power
plug out
Don’t
No wet
hands
Don’t
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg13.png)
18
Contents/Precautions
Contents/Precautions
Warning
The DC adapter is for use only in a negative
(-) grounded vehicle. Do not use them in a
positive (+) grounded vehicle.
Fire may result.
Keep the power plugs dust-free.
Otherwise, fire may result.
Place the charger on a stable location
during charging. Do not cover or wrap the
charger in cloth or bedding.
The FOMA phone may become separated, or the
charger may overheat, leading to fire or malfunction.
If it starts to thunder, do not touch the
FOMA phone and adapter/charger.
You might be struck by lighting or suffer an electric
shock.
Caution
Before cleaning, pull the plug out of the
power outlet or cigarette lighter socket.
Otherwise, electric shock may result.
Always hold the plug when pulling the
adapter/charger out of the power outlet or
socket.
If you pull the plug out by the cord, the cord may be
damaged, which could result in electric shock or fire.
Do not place heavy objects on the
adapter/charger cord and power cord.
Electric shock or fire may result.
Precautions for UIM
Caution
Be careful when removing the UIM (IC
portion).
Your hand or finger may be injured.
Do
Don’t
Do
Pull the power
plug out
Don’t
Don’t
Do
Don’t
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg14.png)
19
Contents/Precautions
Contents/Precautions
Notes on using near electronic medical
equipment
aThe description below meets “Guidelines on the
Use of Radio-communication Equipment such as
Cellular Telephones – Safeguards for Electronic
Medical Equipment” by the Electromagnetic
Compatibility Conference Japan.
Warning
Turn off the phone in crowded areas such as
inside trains during rush hour, as someone
with an implanted cardiac pacemaker or
implanted defibrillator may be near you.
Operation of an implanted cardiac pacemaker or
implanted defibrillator can be affected by radio waves.
Comply with the following in hospitals or
health care facilities:
• Do not carry the FOMA phone into operating
rooms, intensive care units (ICU) or coronary care
units (CCU).
• Turn off the FOMA phone in hospital wards.
• If there is any electronic medical equipment near
you, turn off the FOMA phone even when in a
location such as a lobby.
• Comply with any regulations of hospital and health
care facilities instructing you not to use or carry in a
mobile phone.
• If the Auto Power On function is set, deactivate the
setting, then turn the power off.
If you use an implanted cardiac pacemaker
or implanted defibrillator, use the mobile
phone 22cm or more away from an
implanted cardiac pacemaker or implanted
defibrillator.
Operation of an implanted cardiac pacemaker or
implanted defibrillator can be affected by radio waves.
Patients using electronic medical equipment
other than implanted cardiac pacemakers
or implanted defibrillators (outside medical
establishments for treatment at home, etc.)
should check the influence of radio waves
upon the equipment by consulting its
manufacturer.
Operation of electronic medical equipment can be
affected by radio waves.
Do
Do
Do
Do
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg15.png)
20
Contents/Precautions
Contents/Precautions
Notes on Handling
General notes
aDo not let the equipment get wet.
The FOMA phone, battery and adapter/charger, UIM
(FOMA card) are not waterproofed. Do not use them in
environments, which are high in humidity such as in
bathrooms, and do not allow them to get wet from rain.
Furthermore, if carrying them against your body, the
internal parts may become corroded if exposed to body
perspiration.
If the parts are found to have been damaged due to
exposure to the liquids, any repairs will not be covered by
warranty, or repairs may not be possible.
This may be repaired at a cost if repairs are possible.
aUse a dry soft cloth to clean the equipment.
• The screen of the FOMA phone sometimes has a
special coating so that it is easier to see. If you rub it
roughly with a dry cloth, it might be scratched. Take
care of the way of handling, and use only a dry, soft
cloth such as used for cleaning glasses.
When the FOMA phone is left with water drops or stains
on the display, smear might be generated or its coating
might be peeled off.
• Do not use alcohol, thinner, benzene, detergent or other
solvents for cleaning, otherwise the printing may be
removed or discoloration may result.
aOccasionally clean the connecting terminals of
the equipment using a dry cotton swab.
If the connector terminal becomes soiled, the connection
might deteriorate so that the power goes off or the battery
does not charge fully. Wipe the connector terminal with a
dry cloth or cotton swab.
aDo not place the FOMA phone near an air
conditioner outlet.
Condensation may form due to rapid changes in
temperature, and this may corrode internal parts and
cause malfunction.
aDo not place the FOMA phone in places where
it may be subjected to excessive pressure.
Do not place the FOMA phone in a bag along with many
other articles or in a trouser pocket, because this can
damage the LCD display and internal circuitry.
Malfunctions caused by such damage are not covered by
the warranty.
aDo carefully read each instruction manual
attached to the battery or adapter/charger.
Notes on handling the FOMA phone
aAvoid using in extremely high or low
temperatures.
The FOMA phone should be used within a temperature
range of -20 °C to 60°C and a humidity up to 85%.
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg16.png)
21
Contents/Precautions
Contents/Precautions
Next Page
aThe FOMA phone, if operated near ordinary
phones, televisions or radios that are in use,
may affect them. You should operate your
FOMA phone as far away from such equipment
as possible.
aIt is recommended that you make separate
notes of the information stored in the FOMA
phone and keep such notes in a safe place.
We take no responsibility for any loss of the stored data
items.
aDo not sit with the FOMA phone in your
trousers or skirts pocket. Do not place the
FOMA phone under heavy objects in a bag.
Malfunction may result.
aMake sure that nothing, such as a strap, gets
caught between the parts of the FOMA phone
when you close it.
Otherwise, malfunction or breakage may result.
aThe FOMA phone becomes warm during use or
charging but this is not an abnormality. Use the
FOMA phone as it is.
aDo not leave the FOMA phone with a camera
pointing direct to the sunlight.
Pixels may be discolored or burns may result.
Notes on handling batteries
aBatteries have a limited life.
If the usable time of your FOMA phone is extremely short
even when the battery is fully charged, replace the battery.
Make sure that you only buy the specified battery.
aCharge the battery in a place with an ambient
temperature of 0°C to +40°C.
aMake sure that the battery is charged when
you use the FOMA phone for the first time or
have not used it for a long period of time.
aThe usable time of the battery varies depending
on the usage environment or its remaining life.
aStore the batteries in a well ventilated place out
of direct sunlight.
When you do not use the battery for a lengthy period of
time, remove it from the FOMA phone with the battery
power completely drained, and store it in the plastic bag
wrapping the battery pack.
Notes on handling chargers and adapters
aCharge the battery in a place with an ambient
temperature of 0°C to 40°C.
aCharge the battery where:
• There is excessive humidity, vibration, and dust.
• There are no ordinary phones, television sets or radios
nearby.
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg17.png)
22
Contents/Precautions
Contents/Precautions
aDuring charging, the adapter or charger may
become warm. This is not an abnormality, so
continue charging.
aDo not use the DC Adapter for charging the
battery when the car engine is not running.
The car battery could go flat.
aWhen using the power outlet having the
disengaging prevention mechanism, observe
the instructions given in that instruction manual.
aDo not give a strong shock. Also, do not
deform the charging terminal.
Malfunction may result.
Notes on handling the UIM
aNever use more force than necessary when
detaching the UIM.
aDo not use unnecessary force when inserting it
into the phone.
aThe UIM may become warm during use, but
this is not a sign of a malfunction. Continue
using it as it is.
aThe warranty does not cover damage caused
by inserting the UIM into some other types of
IC card reader/writer.
aAlways keep the IC portion clean.
aUse a dry soft cloth to clean the equipment.
aIt is recommended that you make separate
notes of the information stored on the UIM and
keep such notes in a safe place.
We take no responsibility for any loss of the stored data
items.
aFor the environmental protection, bring any
unneeded UIMs to a handling counter such as
a DoCoMo shop.
aAvoid using in extremely high or low
temperatures.
aDo not damage, carelessly touch, or short-
circuit the IC.
Data might be lost or damage to the IC could result.
aDo not drop the UIM or subject it to strong
impacts.
Malfunction may result.
aDo not bend the UIM or place heavy objects on
it.
Malfunction may result.
Notes on handling the Camera
You may be imposed punishment according to the
law and rule (such as nuisance prevention ordinance)
if you use the FOMA phone to give a remarkable
nuisance and misdeed to the public.
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg18.png)
23
Contents/Precautions
Contents/Precautions
Intellectual Property Rights
Copyrights and Rights of Portrait
You have no right to copy, modify, or distribute the contents
of which a third party holds the copyright such as text,
images, music, or software downloaded from web pages on
the Internet, or images shot by the cameras of this product
without permission from the copyright holder except for when
the copy or quote is for personal use that is allowed by the
Copyright Law.
Note that it may be prohibited to shoot or record live
performances or exhibitions even for personal use. Make sure
that you refrain from taking portraits of other persons and
distributing such portraits over the Internet without consent,
as this violates portrait rights.
Trademarks
• “FOMA”, “mova”, “i-mode”, “i-appli”, “i-motion”, “i-motion
Mail”, “MessageF”, “i-melody”, “mopera”, “mopera U”,
“WORLD CALL”, “WORLD WING”, “Deco-mail” “Public
mode”, “My DoCoMo” and the logos of “FOMA”, “i-mode”,
and “i-appli” are trademarks or registered trademarks of
NTT DoCoMo, Inc.
• “Multitask” is a trademark of the NEC Corporation.
• “Catch phone” (Call Waiting Service) is a registered
trademark of Nippon Telegraph and Telephone
Corporation.
• Java and Java related trademarks and logos are
trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems,
Inc. in the United States and other countries.
• miniSD
TM
is a trademark of SD Association.
• NetFront and are trademarks
or registered trademarks of ACCESS Co.,Ltd. In Japan and
other countries.
• Microsoft, MS, and Windows are registered trademarks or
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States
and other countries.
• Windows XP is abbreviation of Microsoft
®
Windows
®
XP
Professional operating system or Microsoft
®
Windows
®
XP
Home Edition operating system.
• Windows 2000 is Microsoft
®
Windows
®
2000 Professional
operating system.
• Windows Me is abbreviation of Microsoft
®
Windows
®
Millennium Edition operating system.
• Windows 98 is abbreviation of Microsoft
®
Windows
®
98
operating system.
• Windows 98SE is abbreviation of Microsoft
®
Windows
®
98
operating system SECOND EDITION.
• Sometimes transcribed like Windows XP, 2000, Me, 98SE,
98.
Please respect the privacy of individuals around you when
taking and sending photos using camera-equipped mobile
phones.
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg19.png)
24
Contents/Precautions
Contents/Precautions
• Other company names and product names described in
the text are trademarks or registered trademarks of those
companies.
Others
• This product contains NetFront v3.0 for FOMA Internet
browser software of ACCESS Co., Ltd.
NetFront v3.0 is a product of ACCESS Co., Ltd.
Copyright© 1996-2006 ACCESS Co., Ltd.
• Some part of the software in this product contains modules
developed by Independent JPEG Group.
• Adobe and Acrobat Reader are trademarks or registered
trademarks of Adobe systems Incorporated in the US and
other countries.
• This product is licensed under the MPEG-4 patent portfolio
license for the personal and non-commercial use of a
consumer to
– encode video in compliance with the MPEG-4 Visual
Standard (“MPEG-4 Video”) and/or
– decode MPEG-4 Video that was encoded by a consumer
engaged in a personal and non-commercial activity
and/or was obtained from a licensed video provider. No
license is granted or implied for any other use.
Additional information may be obtained from MPEG LA, LLC.
• Licensed by QUALCOMM Incorporated under one or more
of the following United States Patents and/or their
counterparts in other nations:
4,901,307 5,490,165 5,056,109 5,504,773 5,101,501
5,506,865 5,109,390 5,511,073 5,228,054 5,535,239
5,267,261 5,544,196 5,267,262 5,568,483 5,337,338
5,600,754 5,414,796 5,657,420 5,416,797 5,659,569
5,710,784 5,778,338
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg1a.png)
25
Contents/Precautions
Contents/Precautions
Accessories and Main Options
<Accessories>
• Instruction manual
•Quick Manual
included (P316)
• L601i Handset
(with Warranty and
Rear Cover L01)
• CD-ROM for L601i
<Main Options>
• FOMA AC Adapter 01
Compatible with standard
• FOMA AC Adapter for Abroad 01
(With Warranty card and Instruction Manual)
Other Options >P297
• Battery Pack L01
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg1b.png)
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg1c.png)
27
Confirming before use
Phone Parts and Functions .................. 28
Display ................................................... 31
Menu Operations................................... 34
How to Use the Soft Keys..................... 34
Main Side Button Operations ............... 35
Using the UIM (FOMA Card) ................. 36
Attaching/Removing the
Battery Pack .......................................... 37
Charging the FOMA Phone................... 39
Turning Power ON................................. 43
Turning Power OFF ............................... 43
Clock/Time ............................................ 43
Using Caller ID Notification Service ..... 43
Own Number.......................................... 43
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg1d.png)
28
Confirming before use
Ç)égópëOÇÃämîF
Confirming before use
Phone Parts and Functions
The Name and function of each part of the FOMA phone are as follows.
• This manual describes operation of each button using an illustration of the button.
2
3
5
4
6
7
8
9
!
"
#
$
%
,
+
~
)
&
1
(
-
:
;
.
/
<
=
Dimensions (H x W x D):
Approx. 89 x 47 x 25 mm
When closed excluding a
projection part
Weight:
Approx. 120g
With battery attached
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg1e.png)
29
Confirming before use
Confirming before use
Next Page
1Earpiece/Speaker
Sounds for incoming calls and alarm.
Also, you hear the other party’s voice through this
speaker when using the speaker phone.
: When you use speakerphone, you should not close the ear.
2Main display >P31
3Camera
For shooting still images and moving images, and for
sending images on a video-phone call. Rotate the
camera to take a shot.
>P52, P101, P106
4Earphone/Microphone terminal
For connecting a Flat-plug Earphone/Microphone Set
with Switch (option) ,etc. Do not forcibly pull the
earphone/microphone cover .
: You can rotate it forward or inward in the status of opening.
5MMail button
Press from the Stand-by display to bring up the Mail
menu. >P128
Press from the Stand-by display for two seconds to
receive i-mode mail. >P117, P143
6KNavigation button
For selecting an item and scrolling the display.
The following operations can be performed from the
Stand-by display:
UUp button : The phonebook list screen appears.
>P60
DDown button : The custom menu screen appears.
>P173
LLeft button : Received call screen appears.
>P78
RRight button : Redialed call screen appears.
>P79
7TVideo-phone button
Press to make/receive video-phone calls. >P52, P54
Press on the Stand-by display to view the other party that
you made the latest call.
Press to switch modes, etc. in entering mode
(Pictograph/Symbol/Emoticon).
8CMenu/Select button
Press on the Stand-by display to bring up the Main
menu.
>
P34
An operation displayed in the soft key area can be
executed.
>
P34
9AStart button
Press to make/receive voice calls. >P46, P48
Press on the Stand-by display to view the other party
that you made the latest call.
Switch between full-pitch and half-pitch while
characters are entered.
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg1f.png)
30
Confirming before use
Ç)égópëOÇÃämîF
Confirming before use
*You need to obtain a miniSD memory card separately to use the functions related to the miniSD memory card. >P166
!FEVolume buttons
For adjusting the volume >P35
"Dial button
#GCamera button
Press from the Stand-by display to start up a camera.
>P101
$*(asterisk) button
Press to enter “ ” and to switch between upper case
and lower case while characters are entered.
%Microphone
For speaking to the other party.
For recording sound when shooting moving images by
the camera.
&Ii-mode button
Press from the Stand-by display to bring up the i-
mode menu. >P110
Press for two seconds from the Stand-by display to
bring up software list screen. >P149
Press from the entering character mode to switch the
mode (Hiragana/Katakana/English/ Number)
An operation displayed in the soft key area can be
executed. >P34
(NMultitask button
Press to bring up the Task Manager.
Press and hold for at least one second to bring up the
New Task screen.
>P269
)QClear button
Press to return to the previous operation.
Also, press to clear entered text.
~PPower/End button
Press to turn the power on. Press and hold for at least
2 seconds to turn the power off. >P43
Press to end calls and end functions.
+#(Sharp)/ Manner Mode button
Press and hold for at least one second from the
Stand-by display to activate/deactivate the Manner
Mode. >P70
Also, press to enter “#” and to start a new line while
characters are entered.
,Connector terminal
For connecting adapters and cables.
-Sub display >P32
.Light
Press to light up for shooting by the camera.
/Antenna
Do not cover the antenna with your hands, etc. to use
the phone in better conditions.
:Strap hole
;Rear cover
<Infrared data port
Point this port to the other device for infrared
exchange. >P174
=miniSD memory card slot
Open the cover to insert a miniSD memory card.
>P167
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg20.png)
31
Confirming before use
Confirming before use
Next Page
Display
Main Display
1~ : Shows the level of the received radio waves.
: Out of service area.
2: Displayed during a voice call.
: Displayed during a video-phone call.
: Displayed during a voice call using the speaker phone.
3(Blinks): while i-mode is activated.
(Blinks): during i-mode transmission.
: Displayed during trying dialup connection.
: Displayed during dialup connection.
: Displayed while an SSL-enabled page is displayed or
obtained.
4: Displayed while “All Call Rejection” is activated.
5: Displayed while a function (Task) is activated.
6(White): Displayed when the i-mode Center holds mail.
(Pink): Displayed when the box for i-mode mail at the i-
mode Center is full.
(White): Displayed when the i-mode Center holds a
MessageR (Request).
(Pink): Displayed when the box for MessagesR.
(Request) at the i-mode Center is full.
(White): Displayed when the i-mode center holds a
MessageF (Free).
(Pink): Displayed when the box for MessagesR/F at the
i-mode Center is full.
(White): Displayed when the i-mode Center holds mail,
a messageR (Request) and a messageF (Free).
(Pink): Displayed when the boxes for i-mode mail,
MessagesR (Request) and MessagesF (Free) at the i-
mode Center are full.
7(White): Displayed when unread mail exists.
(White): Displayed when an unread SMS message exists.
(White): Displayed when unread mail and SMS
message exist.
(Pink): Displayed when the inbox is full.
: Displayed when the area for SMS messages in the
UIM (FOMA card) is full.
1 23456 789!" #
$%&()
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg21.png)
32
Confirming before use
Ç)égópëOÇÃämîF
Confirming before use
*You need to obtain a miniSD memory card separately to use the functions related to the miniSD memory card. >P166
8(White): Displayed when a Voice Mail message exists.
(Pink): Displayed when the box for Voice Mail
messages is full.
9(White): Displayed when an unread MessageR
(Request) exists.
(Pink): Displayed when the box for MessagesR
(Request) is full.
!: Displayed when an unread MessagesF (Free) exists.
(Pink): Displayed when the box for MessagesF (Free) is
full.
": Displayed when i-appli is being started.
: Displayed when i-appli auto start failed.
#~ : Shows the battery level.
$(Pink): Displayed during Manner mode.
(Blue): Displayed during Original manner mode.
%: Displayed when the ringtone for incoming voice
call or video-phone call sounds, not activating a
vibration.
: Displayed the vibration for incoming call is
activated to “Pattern 1” or “Pattern 2” the alarm is
mute when incoming voice call or video-phone
call, and the vibration operated being linked with a
melody.
: Displayed when a vibration and a ringtone sounds
at the same time.
: Displayed when a vibration and a ringtone do not
activate.
&: Displayed while an alarm is set.
: Displayed when today’s schedule exists.
: Displayed when an alarm is set and today’s
schedule exists.
(: Displayed while a miniSD memory card is inserted.
):Displayed when an error occurs on the UIM (FOMA
card).
Sub Display
1
~
: Shows the level of the received radio waves.
: Out of service area.
2: Displayed during a voice call.
: Displayed during a video-phone call.
123456
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg22.png)
33
Confirming before use
Confirming before use
: Displayed while using the speaker phone.
: Displayed during trying dialup connection.
: Displayed during dialup connection.
3: Displayed while “All Call Rejection” is activated.
4(White): Displayed when the i-mode Center holds mail,
MessageR/F, an unread mail, SMS, MessageR/F, or
the message in answering machine exists.
(Pink): Displayed when the box for mail, MessageR/F
at the i-mode Center Mail, SMS, MessageR/F, or the
message in answering machine is full in inbox or
FOMA card (UIM card).
5: Displayed when an alarm is set.
: Displayed when today’s schedule exists.
: Displayed when an alarm is set and today’s
schedule exists.
6~ : Show the battery level.
Subdisplay
The various information such as clock, icons are displayed
as follow.
<Clock> <Alarm> <Incoming call>
Missed call/ New received E-mail
When closing the flip of FOMA handset, “X Missed call” or
“X Message” is displayed.
<Missed call> <New message>
• When you open the flip on displaying “X Missed call”,
you can view the time or phone number in main display.
You can view the call history by pressing C. If you
press I[Close], “X Missed call” will not be displayed
anymore.
• When you open the flip on displaying “X Message”, the
pop up message on the subdisplay will be disappeared
after confirming the screen.
Information
• After closing the FOMA phone, the contents of sub display will
be slided to other place.
(Thu)(Thu)
1 Message
(Thu)(Thu)
1 Missed call
NTT DoCoMo
Alarm 1
12 : 34
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg23.png)
34
Confirming before use
Ç)égópëOÇÃämîF
Confirming before use
Menu Operations
Example: How to set the “Stand-by display” of the “Main
display”.
aSelecting a function by K
1. On the Stand-by display, C[Menu] ]Enlarge
by using K]C]Highlight “Main display” by
using H]Move the cursor to “Stand-by display”
by using H]C
aSelecting a function by pressing the key
corresponding to the menu number
1. On the Stand-by display, C[Menu] ]Enlarge
by using K]C]1]1
How to Use the Soft Keys
To execute an operation displayed in the soft key area on
the Main display, press the corresponding button as
below.
Information
• (Navigation icon) that indicates the directions in which you
can scroll and select items using Kis also displayed in the
soft key area.
• Items displayed in the soft key area vary depending on the
display.
KC 1 1
1 Main display
2 Sub display
3 Font
4 Menu style
5 Backlight
6 Color scheme
Display
Select
1 Stand-by display
2 Incoming call
3 Outgoing call
Select
Display
Select
Display
KC HC HC
1 Main display
2 Sub display
3 Font
4 Menu style
5 Backlight
6 Color scheme
Display
Select
1 Stand-by display
2 Incoming call
3 Outgoing call
Select
Display
Select
Display
01/01[Sun]
Soft key area
Mail Menu i-mode
Mail Menu i-mode
Mail Menu i-mode
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg24.png)
Main Side Button Operations
aMajor operations that can be performed by pressing
FE/Gwith the FOMA phone closed
aMain operations that can be executed by pressing
FE/Gwith the FOMA phone opened
35
Confirming before use
Confirming before use
Play back/pause moving
images/a melody
Start the camera
When moving images/a melody is
paused ]G(Play back)
While moving images/a melody is
played back ]G(Pause)
During standby ]Press G
FOMA phone operation How to operate
Adjust the button tone
volume During standby ]FE
During a voice call/video-phone
call ]FE
Adjust the volume for
moving image/melody
playback
Scroll the List display by
page
• The cursor is moved on
some displays.
Switch the Monthly
Schedule displays by month
While moving images/a melody is
played back ]FE
While each List display is
displayed ]FE
While the Monthly Schedule
display is displayed ]FE
Zoom
While the Still Image/Moving
Image Finder display is displayed
]FE
Adjust the volume
Incoming call ]Press Gfor two
seconds
While an alarm / schedule alarm is
sounding ]Press Efor two
seconds
Stop the alarm
Reject an incoming call
In stand-by (OFF >ON) ]F/G
In stand-by (ON >OFF) ]E
Switch the display light of
the sub display to ON/OFF
FOMA phone operation How to operate
Adjust the volume of a ring
tone for incoming call Incoming call ]FE
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg25.png)
36
Confirming before use
Ç)égópëOÇÃämîF
Confirming before use
Using the UIM (FOMA Card)
Your phone number and contracted contents for the
service, etc. are recorded in the UIM. You need to insert it
into the FOMA phone to make/receive calls or perform
transmission.
Refer to the UIM manual for details of how to use it.
Inserting/Removing UIM (FOMA Card)
Insert/remove the UIM after you remove the rear cover
and battery pack and turn off the power of the FOMA
phone beforehand (P38).
• Remove the AC adapter and options beforehand.
Inserting
1. Insert the UIM with its IC-side facing downwards
in the direction of the arrow underneath the guide.
Removing
1. While pressing the stopper from the above, slide
the UIM in the direction of the arrow to remove it.
Notch
Guide
Stopper
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg26.png)
37
Confirming before use
Confirming before use
Information
• When inserting or removing the FOMA card, close the flip, and
then put it on your hand. Take care not to accidentally torch or
scratch the IC.
About Password of UIM
You can set two passwords, PIN1 and PIN2, for a UIM.
>P96
UIM Restriction Functions
The UIM has a restriction function to protect your data and
files.
If you obtain the following types of data and files with the
UIM inserted, restrictions are automatically imposed to
disable them when the UIM is not inserted or when
another UIM is inserted.
• Images/melodies/i-motion/i-appli obtained from sites
and Internet web pages
• Files attached to i-mode mail messages and
MessagesR/F
Differences of UIM
There are two types of UIM, the green UIM and the blue
UIM. There are differences in specifications of the following
functions between those UIMs:
Attaching/Removing the Battery Pack
Make sure that you attach the dedicated battery pack L01
for FOMA L601i to use it.
UIM (Green)
Function UIM (Blue)
Number of digits of the phone
book that can be stored in the
UIM phonebook
Up to 26 digits Up to 20 digits
WORLD WING Can be used Cannot be used
Service dialing Can be used Cannot be used
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg27.png)
38
Confirming before use
Ç)égópëOÇÃämîF
Confirming before use
Attaching
1. While pressing the rear cover in the direction of the
arrow 1, slide it in the direction of the arrow 2.
2. Insert the battery pack in the direction of the arrow
1
with the label facing upwards and
2
push it in the
direction of the arrow.
3. Slide the rear cover in the direction of the arrow
until it clicks to attach it in place.
Removing
1. While pressing the rear cover in the direction of the
arrow of 1, slide it in the direction of the arrow 2
to remove it.
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg28.png)
39
Confirming before use
Confirming before use
Next Page
2. Take the projection of the battery pack to lift it up
in the direction of the arrow.
Information
• Attach/ remove the battery pack with the FOMA phone closed
and held in your hand after you turn off the power. In addition,
If you attach/ remove the battery pack forcibly, it may damage
the charging connector of battery.
• Take care not to attach or remove the rear cover. Note that if
the rear cover is forcibly, the slot of rear cover can be damaged.
• For details about the battery, see the manual for Battery Pack L01.
Charging the FOMA Phone
Charging
Connect exclusive AC Adapter (option) to charge the
battery after attaching the battery pack to the FOMA
phone (P38). You need FOMA AC Adapter 01 for both
overseas and domestic usage (option) separately when
using the FOMA phone overseas.
1. Open the cover of the external connector terminal
of the FOMA phone.
: You can rotate it forward or inward in the status of
opening.
2. While pressing the release buttons on both sides
of the connector of the AC adapter, connect it
horizontally to the FOMA phone with the arrows-
engraved side facing upwards in the direction of
the arrow.
3. Insert the AC adapter’s plug into a power socket.
Projection
Release button
AC100V
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg29.png)
40
Confirming before use
Ç)égópëOÇÃämîF
Confirming before use
• If you start to charge the battery, the charging start
tone will sound.
• When the battery is charged with the FOMA phone
turned on, the battery level icon ( ) is displayed.
After charging, the alarm sound for ending the
charging will ring, and then animation is disappeared.
• If you charge the FOMA phone with the power off, the
animation for the battery level is displayed. When
charging finishes, the charging end tone sounds and
the animation ends.
• When switching on the phone by charger, the following
message appears depending on battery level. When
"Charging" or "Charging done", the animation or mark
of battery is displayed at the same time.
- In case the battery is empty: “Please wait” >“Low
battery Please wait” >“Charging” >“Battery
charged”
- In case the battery is low: “Please wait” >
“Charging” >“Battery charged”
Information
• When you use the FOMA phone for the first time, the battery
pack is not fully charged. Fully charge the battery before using it.
• When you attach the AC adapter to the FOMA phone, do not
use unnecessary force. The FOMA phone and the connector
may be damaged.
• Do not remove the battery pack and the UIM during charging.
• If the battery cannot be charged correctly, turn off the power
once, remove the battery pack, and then reattach it to charge
the battery again.
• If the battery level becomes less than 10% during a video-
phone call, connecting the AC adapter may not charge the
battery fully, and the power may go off.
• Refer to the instruction manuals for FOMA AC Adapter 01
(option) and FOMA AC Adapter 01 for both overseas and
domestic usage (option) for details.
• When switching on the phone by charger, the stand-by screen
will be returned with displaying power on animation if you press
power key for at least one second in a screen of charging.
Removing the AC Adapter
After charging completes, disconnect the AC adapter from
the FOMA phone.
1. Disconnect the connector's plug from the power
socket.
2. While pressing the release buttons on both sides
of the connector, remove it horizontally from the
FOMA phone in the direction of the arrow.
Release button
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg2a.png)
41
Confirming before use
Confirming before use
Next Page
3. Close the cover of the external connector terminal
of the FOMA phone.
Checking the Battery Level
You can check an estimate of the battery level by the
Battery Level display.
• The Battery Level display indicates just an estimate of
the battery level.
<Main display > <Sub display>
When You Need to Charge the Battery
If the battery is completely flat, a message appears,
flickers, and the battery alarm sounds. If you press
C
, the
battery alarm will be stopped with disappearing the message.
Information
•
If you set “Manner mode” or “Original manner mode” of battery
alarm, the alert tone does not ring.
Precautions on the Battery Pack
Use the FOMA phone’s dedicated Battery Pack to get the
most out of the your FOMA phone.
aBattery life
• Batteries are consumables. The usage time of all
chargeable batteries shortens slightly each time they
are charged. The battery’s life is considered to be
exhausted when the usage time of the battery after
charging is about half the time it was at purchase.
(The life of the battery is about one year. However, it
might be shorter if used very frequently.)
aDo not charge for long periods of time (several days)
with the FOMA phone turned on.
• Do not leave the FOMA phone power on for long
periods of time while charging. Otherwise, when
charging finishes, the FOMA phone will attempt to
receive power from the battery so that when you
actually use the FOMA phone, you will be able to do
so for just a short amount of time before the battery
alarm sounds. If this happens, charge the battery
correctly. When charging the battery again, first
disconnect the FOMA phone from the AC adapter
and then set it again.
For environmental protection, bring the exhausted
battery to an NTT DoCoMo, dealer, or recycle shop.
Li-ion
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg2b.png)
42
Confirming before use
Ç)égópëOÇÃämîF
Confirming before use
aEstimated usage time for battery
The usable time of the battery varies depending on the
usage environment or its remaining life.
• Continuous talk time is the estimated time when radio
waves can be sent and received normally.
• Continuous stand-by time is the estimated time you
can use the FOMA phone in motion when it is closed
and can receive radio waves normally. The standby
time could be about half of this estimate depending
on the battery level, function settings, other ambient
conditions such as temperature, the status of radio
waves in the area (weak or no radio waves, for
instance) and the status of the network of the country
in which you stay. The continuous standby time will
be shorter if you don't insert the UIM (FOMA card).
When you use i-mode communications, the
talk/transmission time and standby time will be
shorter. Further, even if you do not make calls or
execute i-mode transmission, the talk/transmission
time and standby time will be shorter if you compose
i-mode mail, start up a downloaded i-appli.
• The continuous standby time for standstill is the
average number of hours you can use the FOMA
phone in standstill status when it is closed and can
receive radio waves normally.
• The continuous standby time for in motion is the
average number of hours you can use the FOMA
phone in the combined status of ”standstill”, “moving”
and “out of service area” when it is closed, in an area
where it can receive radio waves normally.
• The talk/transmission time and standby time will also
be shorter than the above-mentioned estimates when
you execute data transmission or multi-access or
when you use the camera or the light.
aEstimated time for charging battery
• The estimated charging time is for when the FOMA
phone is off and the battery is being charged from
empty. The charging time will be longer if you charge
the battery with the power turned on.
aOther precautions
• The battery does not have to be empty before you
charge it.
• Do not use any other adapter than the specified one.
It may shorten the life of the battery.
• Make sure the battery is charged when you have not
used the FOMA phone for a long period of time
because the life of the battery becomes shorter.
FOMA AC Adapter 01 Approx. 180 minutes
Stand-by time
Network Continuous talk time
FOMA / 3G Static : about 550 hrs
Dynamic : about 450 hrs
Voice call : about 200 min
Video call : about 150 min
GSM/GPRS Static : about 500hrs Voice call: 350 minutes
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg2c.png)
43
Confirming before use
Confirming before use
Turning Power ON
• Before you turn on the power, make sure that the UIM is
inserted and that the battery is fully charged.
1. Press P
• After the Wake-up display is displayed, the Stand-by
display appears.
Information
•When charging, you need to press and hold Pfor at least 2
seconds.
•If “PIN code request” (P90) is set to “ON”, you need to enter
your PIN1 code.
•If “All lock” (P90) is set to “Power on”, you need to enter your
terminal security code.
Turning Power OFF
1. Press and hold Pfor at least two seconds
• The Exit display appears and the power is off.
Information
•The time to turn off the FOMA phone will be longer. Depending
on the status of network, the lead time can be different. During
switching off the power, do not repeat to power on/off.
Clock/Time
You can set the date and time and daylight saving time.
See “Setting Date & Time” (P86) for details of how to set
them up.
Using Caller ID Notification Service
The Caller ID Notification Service enables you to notify the
other party of your phone number when you make a call.
See “Using Caller ID Notification Service” (P194) for details
of how to set it up.
Own Number
You can display your phone number recorded in the UIM.
1. On the Stand-by display, C]0
• See “Displaying Own Number” (P65) for details of
how to change the settings on the Own Number
display.
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg2d.png)
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg2e.png)
45
Making Calls ...........................................46
Receiving Calls.......................................48
Using Public mode (power off) ..............49
Making Calls/
Receiving Calls
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg2f.png)
46
Making Calls/Receiving Calls
Making Calls/Receiving Calls
Making Calls
1. Enter the other party’s phone number
<Enter Phone Number>
•Q:The last digit is cleared. To clear all digits,
press and hold it for at least one second.
•C[Save]: You can add new phone number to
phonebook. This function is activated by step 2 on
page 58.
•I[Search]: You can search for the phone number in
phonebook. See the contents after step 3 on page 60.
2. A
]
Start talking when the other party answers
• Press and hold Qfor at least two second: You
can switch ON/OFF the speaker phone.
•I[Hold]/[Unmark] : You can put a call on hold or
release hold.
: Unavailable unless you are the Call waiting service subscriber.
3. Pto end the call after talking.
Information
• If you press Aafter entering the number from 0 to 9 in the
Enter Phone Number screen, you can make a call directly
matching the the number saved in memory.
• When the Flat-plug Earphone/Microphone Set with Switch
(option) is attached, you can only talk on the Earphone /
Microphone regardless that the speaker phone is ON/OFF.
• When the call is disconnected, the alert sound sounds from a
receiver.
Using the Submenus of the Enter Phone
Number Display
1. From the Enter Phone Number screen (see left),
M[Menu]
]
Select from the following submenu
items
Notify caller ID
Set whether to notify your phone number per call.
–Not notify : “#31#” is added in front of the phone
number entered, but the phone number is not notified.
–Notify : “ 31#” is added in front of the phone
number entered, and the phone number is notified.
–Cancel : The added “#31#” or “ 31#” is deleted.
Menu Save
The other party's name Ŧ1
The other party's phone number
Call duration
The other party's picture Ŧ2
Ŧ1: In case of the other party you don't
register the information in phonebook,
“Unregistered” will be displayed when
receiving or making a call.
Ŧ2: The picture will be displayed when
you register the picture in phonebook.
Talking
EpDpNp!Ubsp
Menu Save Search
<Talking>
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg30.png)
47
Making Calls/Receiving Calls
Making Calls/Receiving Calls
Next page
Select prefix
The number saved in “Setting the Prefix” (P83) is
added in front of the phone number entered.
International call
The international access code saved in “International dial
setting” (P84) is added in front of the phone number
entered.
Save
You can save the entered phone number into the
Phonebook. Go to step 2 on page 58 of "Adding to
Phonebook".
Search phonebook
You can search for the phone number in phonebook. After
searching, Go to step 3 on page 60 of " Searching for
Phonebook Entries".
Information
•You can make a call after inputting “#31#”(Not notify) or “
31#” (Notify) in front of phone number.
Using the Submenus of the Talking screen
1. From the Talking screen (P46), M[Menu]
]
Select
from the following submenu items
New call 1
You can put the current call on make and hold a call
to another party.
End active call
You can hang up the call.
Hold 1/Cancel held call 1
You can put/release the call on hold.
Mute 2/Unmute 2
You can mute/unmute the voice transmitted to the other
party.
1: Available for Call Waiting Service subscribers only.
To use this service, go to “Using Call Waiting Service” (P192).
2: Not displayed during call is held.
Making a Call From the Dialed/Received Call Record
1. From the Stand-by display, L/R/A/T
]
Select a record ]
A
Information
•See “Using the Submenu of the Received Calls display” (P78) for
submenus.
Making a Call from the Phonebook
1. From the Stand-by display, L/R/A/T
]
Select the other party you want to call
]
A
Information
• To switch the phonebook list to display between the FOMA
phone and UIM, select M[Menu] >“Display switch” >
“Display data” on the phonebook list screen.
International Calls
You can make an international call easily using the
DoCoMo international call service “WORLD CALL”.
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg31.png)
48
Making Calls/Receiving Calls
Making Calls/Receiving Calls
When you have signed up for FOMA service, you have
contracted to use “WORLD CALL” (except those who
have applied not to use it).
aHow to make calls
009130 >010 >Country code >Area code >
Destination phone number >A
• This service is not available with billing plans.
• Application/monthly fee for WORLD CALL is free of
charge.
• The WORLD CALL charges are added to your monthly
FOMA bill.
• Contact “DoCoMo Information Center” on the back
page of this manual for inquiries about WORLD CALL.
• If the other party uses a specific 3G mobile phone
overseas, you can make an “International Video-phone
Call” by dialing out using Tafter following the dialing
method described above.
– See DoCoMo web page for the information about
connectable countries and telecommunications carriers.
– Images sent from the other party may blur on your
FOMA phone or you may not be able to connect,
depending on the other party’s phone used for the
international video-phone.
Making an International Call Easily
• Confirm that the “Setting Prefix Dial” (P83) is set to
“AUTO” and “009130010” (WORLD CALL) is set for
“IDD prefix code” in “IDD prefix setting”.
1. On the Stand-by display, press and hold 0for at
least one second to enter “+”
2. Enter Country code >Area code >Destination
phone number
]
A(T)
3. Pto end the call after talking
Adjusting the Volume
1. Press FE during a call
Information
• The changed volume is held even after ending the call.
Receiving Calls
1. When you receive a call, A
•I[Silent]: You can set to no sound for incoming call.
•A: You can put the call on hold.
2. Pto end the call after talking
• When the call is disconnected, the alert sound
sounds from a receiver.
Menu Silent
Calling
The other party's imageŦ2
Ŧ1: In case the other party you don't
register the information in
phonebook, "Unregistered" will
be displayed.
Ŧ2: The image will be displayed when
you register the picture in phonebook.
DoCoMo Taro
The other party's nameŦ1
The other party's phone number
<Ringing screen>
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg32.png)
49
Making Calls/Receiving Calls
Making Calls/Receiving Calls
Next Page
When you didn't get a call
•C[OK] : You can view the list of received call.
•I[Close] : You can close the screen for missed call.
Using the Submenu of the Ringing Display
1. From the Ringing screen (P48), M[Menu]
]
Select
from the following submenu items
Voice mail 1
The Call is connected to the Voice Mail Service
Center.
Call rejection
The call is disconnected without answering it.
Call forwarding 2
The call is forwarded to the phone number registered.
1: If you use voice mail service menu, you should register this
service in operator. For details, see “Using voice mail
service” (P190).
2: If you use call forwarding menu, you should register this
service in operator. For details, please refer to the “Using
Call Forwarding Service” (P193).
Using Public mode (power off)
Public mode is an auto-answer service that lays stress on
manners in public spaces. Once you activate Public mode
(power off), the guidance is played back telling that you
cannot take the call as you are currently in a place
(in hospital, airplane, or in around priority seat in a train)
where use is prohibited. Then the call is disconnected.
• This FOMA phone does not support Public mode
(Driving mode).
1. *25251
]
A
• Public mode (power off) is set. (Nothing is changed in
the Stand-by display.)
• After setting Public mode (power off) and turning off
the power, the guidance “The person you are calling
is currently in an area where use is prohibited. Please
try again later.” is played back for incoming calls.
aTo release Public mode (power off)
*25250 ]A
aTo check Public mode (power off) for the setting,
*25259 ]A
When Public mode (power off) is activated
When incoming a voice call, the guidance is played back
to the caller telling that
you are currently in an area where use is prohibited,
and then the call is disconnected. When incoming a video-
phone call, the video- guidance is played back to the
caller, and then the call is disconnected.
1 Missed call
DoCoMo Taro
[Thu]
OK Close
The name is not registered in
phonebook cannot be displayed.
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg33.png)
50
Making Calls/Receiving Calls
Making Calls/Receiving Calls
• This setting is continued until you release the setting by
dialing “ 25250”. If you just switch on, this setting is not
released.
• The Public mode (power off) guidance is played back
even when you are out-of-service area or out-of-reach of
radio waves.
Activating between network services and Public
mode (power off)
If you use Public mode (power off) and Network service at
the same time, the operation will be activated as follow.
Depending on the setting or calling, the network service
can be preferred, so the activation of Public mode (power
off) or the record of missed call may not be displayed.
aVoice Mail Service
aCall Forwarding Service
aNuisance Call Blocking Service
aCaller ID Display Request
1: If the ring time for protecting a house or call forwarding is
set to “0 second”, the caller does not hear the Public
mode (power off) guidance, and the call is not recorded in
call history.
2: If the ring time for a call forwarding is set to “0 second”,
the call is not recorded in call history.
3: The call is not recorded in the history of received calls.
Response to Incoming Voice calls
Response to Incoming Video-phone calls
Response to Incoming Voice calls
Response to Incoming Video-phone calls
For the call from the phone
number registered to be rejected,
plays back the Call Rejection
guidance, and then the call is
disconnected. 3
For the call from the phone
number registered to be rejected,
plays back the Call Rejection
guidance, and then the call is
disconnected. 3
Response to Incoming Voice calls
Response to Incoming Video-phone calls
Response to Incoming Video-phone calls
Response to Incoming Voice calls
Plays back the Public mode
(power off) guidance to caller, and
then the call is connected to the
Voice mail Service Center. 1
Does not play back the video
guidance to caller, and the call is
connected without connecting to
the Voice Mail Service Center.
Plays back the Public mode
(power off) guidance to caller, and
then the call is connected to the
Voice mail Service Center. 1The
guidance depends one setting of
Call Forwarding Service.
Does not play back the video
guidance for Public mode, and the
call is forwarded to the forwarding
destination. 2If the destination
does not support video-phone call,
the call is disconnected.
• For the caller without a caller ID,
plays back the Caller ID Request
guidance, and then the call is
disconnected.
• For the caller with a caller ID,
plays back the Public mode
(power off) guidance, and then
the call is disconnected.
• For the caller without a caller ID,
plays back the video guidance
for Caller ID Request, and then
the call is disconnected.
• For the caller with a caller ID,
plays back the video guidance for
Public mode (power off), and
then the call is disconnected.
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg34.png)
51
About Video-phone ................................52
Making Video-phone Calls.....................52
Receiving Video-phone Calls.................54
Changing Settings for
Video-phone Calls..................................55
Making/Receiving
Video-phone Calls
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg35.png)
52
Making/Receiving Video-phone Calls
Making/Receiving Video-phone Calls
About Video-phone
When both you and the other party use DoCoMo video-
phones, you can talk seeing each other.
• DoCoMo video-phones conform to 3G – 324M 2
standardized by the international standard 3GPP 1.
You cannot connect to the video-phone that uses a
different format.
1 : 3GPP (3rd Generation Partnership Project) is the regional
standards organization for developing common technical
specifications for third-generation mobile
telecommunications systems (IMT–2000).
2 : 3G–324M is the international standard for the third
generation of mobile video-phones.
• The video-phone call is activated by the speed of
64kbps.
Making Video-phone Calls
1. Enter the other party’s phone number
• The Enter Phone Number screen (P46) is displayed.
2. T]Start talking when the other party answers
<Talking Display>
• The voice of the other party is heard from the
speaker when starting the call.
• Press and hold Qfor at least two seconds: You
can switch ON/OFF the speaker phone.
•C[Image]/[Camera]: You can switch between
Substitute image and your photo image for sending
to the other party.
•I[Hold]/[Cancel]: You can put the call on hold or
release hold.
3. Press Pto end the call after talking
Information
• See “International Calls” (P48) for how to make international
calls.
•When the Flat-plug Earphone/Microphone Set with Switch
(option) is attached, you can only talk on the Earphone/
Microphone regardless of whether the speaker phone is
ON/OFF.
• You can listen to the voice through speakerphone in spite of
the status of manner mode.
Using the Submenu of the Enter Phone
Number screen
See “Using the Submenus of the Enter Phone Number
screen” (P46) of voice calls for the submenus available.
The other party's image
The volume during a call
Call duration
Own image
Menu Image Hold
Description
Mark
/
Speaker phone ON/OFF
Zooming
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg36.png)
53
Making/Receiving Video-phone Calls
Making/Receiving Video-phone Calls
Using the Submenus of the Talking screen
Setting item/Setting at purchase >P241
1. From the Talking screen (P52), M[Menu] ]Select
from the following submenu items
End call
The call is disconnected.
Hold
You can put the call on hold. You can cancel the
function by pressing I[Cancel].
Substitute image/Camera image
You can switch to the Substitute image for sending to
the other party. >P85
Camera settings
You can set the camera of video phone call. You can
select the icon by pressing J. After setting, press
I[Close].
–Zoom : The camera image is zoomed. (x1/x2)
–Brightness : You can change the brightness of
photo images.
–Night mode : You can set it up when using the
camera in a dark place.
Video-phone settings
You can set the display of video phone call. After
setting, press I[Done]. >P84
–Display setting : You can set the display method
for the Talking screen.
• Both…: The other party’s image and your image
are displayed.
• Other…: Only the other party’s image is displayed.
• Me…: Only your image is displayed.
–Sub screen : If you select “Both” of “video-phone
settings”, you can set the image which displayed
each screen.
• Me…: Only your image is displayed.
• Other…: Only the other party's image is displayed.
–Display light: You can set the lighting method of
the backlight on the Talking screen.
•Always on : Always lights during a call.
•Terminal setting : Follows the settings on the
“Main screen” of the “Backlight”. >P75
Sending image quality
You can set the quality of images to be sent to the
other party.
–Normal : Sends images in standard quality and
motion speed.
–Prefer motion quality : Sends images laying stress
on motion speed. Prefer motion quality is effective
for moving images.
–Prefer image quality : Sends images laying stress
on image quality. Prefer image quality is effective if
there is little motion.
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg37.png)
54
Making/Receiving Video-phone Calls
Making/Receiving Video-phone Calls
Making a Video-phone call from the
Dialed/Received Call Record
1. On the Stand-by display, L/R/A/T]Select
a history ]T
Information
• See “Using the Submenu of the Received Call Record Screen”
(P78) for the submenu.
Making a Video-phone Call from the
Phonebook
1. On the Stand-by display U, or Search for
phonebook entries (P60) ]Select a party to call ]
T
Information
• To switch the phonebook to display between the FOMA
phone and UIM, select M[Menu] >“Display switch” >
“Display data” on the phonebook list screen.
Adjusting the Volume
1. Press H/FE during a call.
Information
• The changed volume is held even after ending the call.
Receiving Video-phone Calls
1. When you receive a call, T/A
•C[Substitute]: You can receive a call. The substitute
image will be sent to the other party.
•P: You can put the call on hold. The holding
image will be sent to the other party. If you press C,
you can answer the call.
2. Pto end the call after talking
Information
•When inserting the switch of the Flat-plug Earphone /
Microphone set with Switch (option), you can connect a call
by earphone regardless of Speakerphone ON/OFF.
• You can listen to the voice through speakerphone on manner
mode.
Menu Image
Calling video-phone
The other party's imageŦ2
Ŧ1: In case the other party you don't
register the information in
phonebook, “Unregistered” will
be displayed.
Ŧ2: The image will be displayed when
you register the picture in
phonebook.
DoCoMo Taro
The other party's nameŦ1
The other party's phone number
<Ringing Display>
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg38.png)
55
Making/Receiving Video-phone Calls
Making/Receiving Video-phone Calls
• If you answer a video-phone call by pressing the switch of the
Flat-plug Earphone/ Microphone set with Switch (option) when
closing the flip, the image on hold will be sent.
Using the Submenus of the Ringing screen
See “Using the Submenus of the Ringing screen” (P49) of
voice calls for the submenus available. Note that “Voice
mail” is not displayed for video-phone calls.
Changing Settings for Video-phone Calls
C]]
3
You can set the operation and display for video-phone
calls. See “Setting Operation and Display for Video-phone
Calls” (P84) and “Selecting an Image for Video-phone
Calls” (P85) for details of the settings.
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg39.png)
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg3a.png)
57
Adding to Phonebook ............................58
Searching for Phonebook Entries..........60
Checking the Number of Saved
Phonebook Entries.................................63
Setting Phonebook.................................63
Setting Groups .......................................64
Displaying Own Number ........................65
Phonebook
On the Stand-by display,
C[Menu] ]or “Phonebook”
To display the Phonebook menu
Select
Phonebook
1 Add to phonebook
2 Search phonebook
3 No. of phonebook
4 Phonebook settings
5 Group settings
6 Own number
Select
Phonebook
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg3b.png)
58
Phonebook
Adding to Phonebook
C]]
1
Two types of phonebooks are available, the phonebook
saved in the handset of the FOMA phone and the
phonebook saved in UIM.
1. From the Phonebook menu (P57), “Add to
phonebook”
<Saving Phonebook Entries>
2. Select an item to save
(Handset) / (FOMA card (UIM))
Select a storage location of the Phonebook (Handset
/ UIM).
(Name)
Enter a name. Unless you enter a name, the
Phonebook entry cannot be saved.
(Reading)
Enter reading of the name. Automatically inserted if
you enter “Name”.
(Number 1 ~ 5) 1
Enter a phone number. If you press M[Icon] after
entering, you can set a mark other than .
(Mail addr 1 – 3) 1 3
Enter a mail address. If you press M[Icon] after
entering, you can set a mark other than .
Group (Handset)/ (Group
(FOMA card (UIM))
Select a group to save.
(Image) 2
Select an image to be displayed when you receive a
call and display Phonebook.
–No image : No image is set.
–Character: You can set the character. Select the
part (Face, Hair, Tops, Bottoms, Acc., Scenery) by
pressing H, and then select the item by pressing
J. After setting, press C.
–Select picture : You can select from images saved
in “My picture” of “Data box”. >P154
–Take picture: You can start a camera. Go to step 2
on page 102 of “Taking Still Images”. The size of
image 80x96 cannot be rotated.
(Set ringtone) 2
You can set a ring tone for when you receive a voice /
video-phone call from registered caller.
–Data box : You can select from melodies saved in
“Melody” of “Data box”. >P164
–Terminal setting : Go to the settings of “Select ring
tone”. >P68
Handset
No group
Name
Reading
Number1
Mail addr1
Add to phonebook
Select Save
Phonebook
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg3c.png)
59
Phonebook
Phonebook
(Set mail ringtone) 2
You can set a ring tone for when you receive mail
from registered sender.
–Data box: You can select from melodies saved in
“Melody” of “Data box”. >P164
–Terminal setting: Follows the settings of
“ringtone”. >P68
(URL) 2
You enter an URL.
(Postal code) 2
You can enter a postal code.
(Home addr) 2
You can enter a home address.
(Company name) 2
You can enter a company name.
(Job title) 2
You can enter a job title.
(Company addr) 2
You can enter a company address.
(Memo) 2
You can enter a memo.
1 : Only one entry is saved if the storage location for the
Phonebook is set to “FOMA card (UIM)”.
2 : Not displayed if the storage location for the Phonebook is set
to “FOMA card (UIM)”.
3 : You register “Phone number XXXX” or “Phone number
XXXX@docomo.ne.jp” (XXXX: Security code) when you add the
mail address including of security code of four digits.
3. After storing, I[Save] ] Enter a memory number
(0-499) ]C
Saving in UIM
1. From the Saving Phonebook Entries screen (P58),
select the (Handset) field ]Select using J
2. Enter required items
• See Step2 (P58) of “Adding to Phonebook” for details
of the items.
3. I[Save]
Information
• For phone numbers of the Phonebook saved in Memory No
0 – 9 (one saved in “Number1”), if you press 0~9and
then press A(T) from the Stand-by display, you can make
a voice (video-phone) call.
• 500 Phonebook entries can be saved in the FOMA phone and
50 Phonebook entries can be saved in the UIM. Note that the
number of savable entries may be fewer depending on the
saved contents. >P63
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg3d.png)
60
Phonebook
Phonebook
Searching for Phonebook Entries
C]]
2
You can display the Phonebook in the FOMA phone
handset / UIM specifying a search method.
1. From the Phonebook menu (P57), “Search
phonebook”
•I[UIM]/[Hndset]: You can switch Phonebook
Search screens between the FOMA phone handset
and the UIM.
2. Select the following search method
Show all data
Press the buttons 1~0corresponding to the
50 Japanese syllables (corresponding to Columns) for
searching. If you press *, you can search for
Other item. You can switch tab of the 50 syllabary by
pressing J.
Group search
You can specify a group for searching. (Group 1~30
(FOMA Handset)/ 1~10 (FOMA card)). After searching,
you can switch groups by pressing J.
Reading search
You can search by entering some of the characters
contained in the reading of the name.
Memory No. search
You can search by entering a memory number (0-499).
You can switch tab of the syllabary by pressing J.
Phone No. search
You can search by entering part of the phone
number.
Domain search
You can search by specifying a domain. You can
switch domains byJ.
• To use specifying domain, see “Creating a domain
list” (P64).
: Not selectable on the Phonebook Search display of UIM.
3. The Phonebook List meeting the search method is
displayed.
<Phonebook List>
•A/T: You can make a voice call or video-phone
call to the selected phone number saved in
phonebook.
•I[Mail] : You can compose i-mode mail to
selected mail address saved in phonebook. Go to
step 3 on page 139 of "Composing i-mode mail ".
: If the selected mail address is not registered in
phonebook, you cannot use this function.
DoCoMo Ichiro
DoCoMo Jiro
DoCoMo Saburo
DoCoMo Taro
• The above is an example of the
screen after carrying out “Show all
data” search.
഼Ȝȥ
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg3e.png)
61
Phonebook
Phonebook
Next Page
4. Select the desired Phonebook
]
C
<Detailed Phonebook>
•A/T: You can make a voice call or video-phone
call to the phone number saved in phonebook.
•C[Call] : You can make a call to selected phone
number.
•C[Mail] : You can compose i-mode mail to selected
mail address saved in phonebook. Go to step 3 on
page 139 of “Composing i-mode mail”.
•C[Connect] : You can connect the homepage of
selected URL.
Using the Submenus of the Phone List
display
Setting item/Setting at purchase >P241
1.From the Phonebook List screen (P60), M[Menu]
]
Select from the following submenu items
Search ctgry menu 1
–
Handset
4
/UIM
5
Group settings :
After “Group
search”, you can set the each displayed group in the
phonebook list screen. Go to step 2 on page 65 of
“Using the Submenus of the Group Settings screen”.
–Input char chg: You can switch entry modes for
the Character Entry column displayed at the top of
the phonebook list screen after “Reading search”.
–Return to input: You can return without “Input
character change”.
–Create domain list: You can create a new domain
list from the Phone List display after “Domain search”.
Go to step 2 on page 64 of “Creating a Domain List”.
Mail/URL 2
–Compose mail: The mail address saved in the
selected Phonebook is entered into the destination.
Go to step 3 on page 139 of “Composing i-mode
mail message”.
–Compose SMS: The phone number saved in the
selected Phonebook is entered into the destination. Go
to step 3 on page 141 of “Creating SMS”.
–Connect to URL: Connected to the web page with
the URL saved in the selected Phonebook.
Add new
You can create a new phonebook. Go to step 2 on page
58 of “Adding to Phonebook” for items to be saved.
Edit
You can edit the selected Phonebook. Go to step 2 on
Page 58 of “Adding to Phonebook” for items to be saved.
Send Ir data 3
You can send the Phonebook selected through
infrared ray communication. For Infrared exchange,
see "Using the Infrared Exchange" (P174).
Menu
002 DoCoMo Ichiro
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg3f.png)
62
Phonebook
Phonebook
Copy
–Copy to UIM 4:You can copy the Phonebook
selected to the UIM.
–Select copy to UIM 4:You can copy multiple
Phonebooks selected to the UIM. If you press M,
you can select all data. After selecting, press
I[Done].
–Copy to handset 5:You can copy the Phonebook
selected to the handset of the FOMA phone.
–Select copy to handset 5:You can copy multiple
Phonebooks selected to the handset of the FOMA
phone. If you press M, you can select all data. After
selecting, press I[Done].
Search by
You can select another search method to display a
phonebook. For the searching method, Go to step 2 on
page 60 of “Searching for Phonebook Entries”.
Delete
–Delete: You can delete the Phonebook selected.
–Delete selected: You can delete the multiple
Phonebooks selected. If you press M, you can
select all data. After selecting, press I[Done].
–Delete all: You can delete Phonebook
(Handset/UIM) to display. After deleting all data, the
display goes back to Stand-by mode.
Display switch
–Display image 3:If an image is registered in
phonebook list, you can set whether to display the
image or not. >P64
–Display data: You can switch Phonebooks
between the handset of the FOMA phone and the
UIM to display. >P63
1: You can user phonebook list by Group search except for “No
group”, “Reading search”, “Phone No. search” and “Domain
search”. You may not be able to select it depending on the
search method or storage status of the Phonebook selected.
2: You cannot select it if no phone number/mail address/URL is
stored in the Phonebook selected.
3: Not selected in Phonebook for UIM.
4: Displayed on the Phonebook of the handset.
5: Displayed on the Phonebook of the UIM.
Information
• During a call, you cannot activate ‘Copy’ and ‘Send Ir data’
menu.
Using the Submenus of the Detailed
Phonebook Display
1.
From the Detailed Phonebook screen (P61), M[Menu]
]Select from the following submenu items
Mail/URL 1
–Compose mail: The mail address saved in the
phonebook displayed is entered into the Address.
Go to step 3 (P139) of “Composing i-mode mail
message”.
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg40.png)
63
Phonebook
Phonebook
–Compose SMS: The phone number saved in the
phonebook displayed is entered into the Address. Go
to step 3 (P141) of “Composing SMS”.
–Connect to URL: Connected to the homepage of
the URL saved in the Phonebook displayed.
Edit
You can edit the phonebook. Go to step 2 on page
58 of “Adding to Phonebook”.
Send Ir data 2
You can send the phonebook entry on display by
infrared. For details, please refer to “Using the Infrared
Exchange Function” (P174).
Copy to UIM 3
You can copy the phonebook entry to the FOMA card
(UIM).
Copy to handet 4
You can copy the phonebook entry to the FOMA handset.
Delete
You can delete the phonebook entry.
1: You cannot select it if no phone number/mail address/URL is
stored in the Phonebook selected.
2: Not selected in Phonebook for UIM.
3: Displayed during displaying the Phonebook of the handset of
the FOMA phone.
4: Displayed during displaying the Phonebook of the UIM.
Information
• During a call, you cannot activate “Copy” and “Send Ir data”
menu.
Checking the Number of Saved
Phonebook Entries
C]]
3
You can check the number of phonebook entries saved in
the handset of the FOMA phone and in the UIM as well as
the number of phonebook entries available.
1.
From the Phonebook menu (P57), “No. of phonebook”
Information
• Actual savable number of phonebook may be fewer depending
on the contents saved in Phonebook of the UIM.
Setting Phonebook
Setting Display Data
C]]
41
You can set whether to display the phonebook of the
handset of the FOMA phone or the phonebook of the UIM
when displaying a phonebook.
Setting item/Setting at purchase >P231
1. From the Phonebook menu (P57), “Phonebook
settings” ]“Display data” ]“Handset only”/“UIM
only”
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg41.png)
64
Phonebook
Phonebook
Creating a Domain List
C]]
42
You can store domains to be used when doing “Domain
Search” (P60).
Setting item/Setting at purchase >P231
1. From the Phonebook menu (P57), “Phonebook
settings” ]“Create domain list”
•I[Disp.] : You can view all domain registered in a list.
: You cannot use this menu when you select no input screen.
•M[Delete] : You can delete the domain saved.
: You cannot use this menu when you select “@docomo.ne.jp”
or no input screen.
2. Select the domain list field
]
C
]Enter a domain
]
C
Selecting a Search Method
C43
You can set the search method for when you pressUon
the Stand-by display and bring up the phonebook search
display.
Setting item/Setting at purchase >P231
1. From the Phonebook menu (P57), “Phonebook
settings”
]
“Search by”
]
Select a search method
•Go to step 2 on page 60 of “Searching the
Phonebook Entries” for the search method.
Information
• If the “Display data” (See left) is set to “UIM only”, you cannot
select “Memory No. search”.
Displaying Images
C]]
44
You can set whether to display the image set when
selecting a phonebook with “ (image setting)” set (P58)
on the phonebook list screen.
Setting item/Setting at purchase >P231
1. From the Phonebook menu (P57), “Phonebook
settings”
]
“Display image”
]
“ON”/“OFF”
Setting Groups
C]]
5
You can save the group name for Group of the
phonebook. You can also set a ring tone for each group.
1. From the Phonebook menu (P57), “Group settings”
•Group settings display appears.
•I[UIM]/[Handset]: You can switch the Group settings
displays between the FOMA phone (handset) and the
UIM.
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg42.png)
65
Phonebook
Phonebook
Next Page
2. Select the group to set
]
C
]
Select the
following item to register
]
After setting, press
I[Finish]
Group name
You can save the name of the group.
Ringtone
You can set a ring tone for when a call comes in.
–Data box: You can select from the melodies stored
in “Melodies” of “ Data box”. >P164
–Terminal setting: Follows the settings of
“ringtone”. >P68
Mail ringtone
You can set a ring tone for when mail comes in.
–Data box: You can select from the melodies saved
in “Melody” of “Data box”. >P164
–Terminal setting: Follows the settings of “Select
ringtone”. >P68
: Not displayed on the Group setting display of the UIM.
Information
• You cannot set to “No group”.
Using the Submenus of the Group Settings
Screen
1. From the Group Settings screen (P64), M[Menu]
]
Select from the following submenu items
Reset 1
You can reset the settings of the group selected.
Move 2
You can change the order of the group selected.
Edit
You can edit the group selected. Go to step 2 (See
left) of “Setting Groups”.
Reset all 3
You can reset the settings and order of all groups.
1: You cannot use this menu when the selected group is not edited.
2: You cannot use this menu in FOMA card group setting screen.
3: You cannot use this menu when not moving or editing a group.
Displaying Own Number
C]]
6
You can display your phone number recorded in the UIM.
1. From the Phonebook menu (P57), “Own number”
• The Own number screen appears.
Information
•
You can also check your own number by pressing
C0
from
the Stand-by display.
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg43.png)
66
Phonebook
Phonebook
Displaying Details of Own Number
1. From the Own number screen, C
[Detail]
]
Enter
your terminal security code
]
C
• The Detail screen appears.
•A/T: You can make a voice/ video-phone call by
the number registered in. (not own number)
•C[Call] : You can make a voice call by the selected
phone number.
: You cannot use your own number.
•C[Mail]: You can compose i-mode mail to selected
mail address.
•C[Connect]: You can connect the homepage of
selected URL.
Using the Submenu of the Detail display
1. From the Detail display (See above), M
[Menu]
]
Select from the following submenu items
Mail/URL 1
–Compose mail: The mail address registered in my
number will be entered to destination. Go to step 3
on page 139 of “Composing Mail”.
–Compose SMS
2
:The phone number registered in
my number will be entered to destination. Go to step
3 on page 141 of “Compose SMS”.
–Connect to URL: You can connect the homepage
of URL registered in my number.
Edit
You can store your own information. For adding
method, Go to step 2 on page 58 of “Adding to
Phonebook”. However, your number registered in
“ ”cannot be edited.
Send Ir data 3
You can send your own number through infrared ray
transmission. For details related to infrared exchange,
go to “Using the Infrared Exchange Function” on P174.
Reset 4
You can reset the edited own number information to
its default.
1: You cannot use this menu if the phone number/ mail/ URL are
not registered.
2: You cannot use the menu despite you operate the number
registered in own number.
3: You cannot use this menu during a call.
4: You cannot use this menu when the own number information is
not edited.
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg44.png)
67
Adjusting the Ring Volume ....................68
Adjusting the Effect Tone Volume .........68
Setting a Ring Tone................................68
Setting an Effect Tone ...........................69
Setting a Vibrator ...................................70
Activating the Manner Mode .................70
Setting Ringing Operations for
Incoming Mail ........................................72
Setting Ringing Time..............................72
Setting Main Screen...............................72
Setting Sub Display................................74
Setting Fonts of Dial Characters ...........75
Setting Menu Style .................................75
Setting Backlight ....................................75
Setting color Scheme.............................76
Sound/
Display
1 Ring volume
2 Effect tone volume
3 Select ringtone
4 Select effect tone
5 Vibration settings
6 Manner settings
7 Mail ring duration
Select
Sound
On the Stand-by display,
C[Menu] ]or “Sound”
To display the Sound menu
1 Main display
2 Sub display
3 Font
4 Menu style
5 Backlight
6 Color scheme
Select
Display
On the Standby display,
C[Menu] ]or “Display”
To display the Display menu
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg45.png)
*You need to obtain a miniSD memory card separately to use the functions related to the miniSD memory card. >P166
68
Sound/Display
Adjusting the Ring Volume
C]]
1
Setting items/Setting at purchase >P234
1. From the Sound menu (P67), “Ring volume” ]
Select from the following adjustment items ]
After setting,I[Done]
Voice call
You can adjust the ring tone volume for voice calls.
Video-phone
You can adjust the ring tone volume for video-phone
calls.
Mail tone
You can adjust the ring tone volume for mail.
MessageR tone
You can adjust the ring tone volume for MessageR.
MessageF tone
You can adjust the ring tone volume for MessageF.
SMS tone
You can adjust the ring tone volume for SMS.
Information
•When you receive mail, mssage R/F, or SMS on opening the
flip, the alarm sound will be fixed to level 1 regardless of each
setting “Ring volume”. However, if you set level 0 of ring tone,
the alarm does not sound.
Adjusting the Effect Tone Volume
C]]
2
Setting items/Setting at purchase >P234
1. From the Sound menu (P67), “Effect tone volume”
]Select from the following adjustment items ]
After setting,I[Done]
Key tone
You can adjust the key pad sound volume.
Power ON/OFF
You can adjust the tone volume for when turning the
FOMA phone on or off.
Flip tone
You can adjust the tone volume for when opening or
closing the FOMA phone.
Feedback tone
You can adjust the tone volume for when a popup is
displayed.
Setting a Ring Tone
C]]
3
You can set the ring tone for voice call, video-phone call
or mail. You cannot set some melodies for ring tones such
MP4 file. But, you can set the SMF or MFi file as a ring
tone.
Sound/Display
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg46.png)
69
Sound/Display
Sound/Display
• You cannot set the melody saved in miniSD memory card.
•
For the melody registered at purchase, see “List of
melody” (P251).
Setting items/Setting at purchase >P234
1. From the Sound menu (P67), “Select ringtone” ]
Select from the following adjustment items ]
After setting, I[Done]
• Select from the melodies stored in “Melody” in “Data
box” respectively. >P164
Voice call
You can select a ring tone for voice calls.
Video-phone
You can select a ring tone for video-phone calls.
Mail tone
You can select a ring tone for mail.
MessageR tone
You can select a ring tone for messageR.
MessageF tone
You can select a ring tone for messageF.
SMS tone
You can select a ring tone for SMS.
Information
• If you have set a ring tone depending on the voice call/ video
phone call/ Mail, the ring tone is preferred. The priority order is
as follows:
1Ringtone set in the FOMA phone’s phonebook >Set the
phonebook (P58)
2Ringtone set for a group of the FOMA phone’s phonebook
>Set group (P64)
3Ringtone volume/Video call ring tone/Mail, Messsage ring
tone >Select the ring tone (P68)
• The sound setting of voice mail will be applied as the setting
value of SMS.
Setting an Effect Tone
C]]
4
Setting items/Setting at purchase >P234, P235
1. From the Sound menu (P67), “Select effect tone” ]
Select from the following adjustment items ]After
setting, I[Done]
Key tone
You can set whether to emit an effect tone for when
you touch the buttons.
Power ON/OFF
You can set whether to emit an effect tone for when
you switch ON or OFF the FOMA phone.
Flip tone
You can set whether to emit an effect tone for when
you open or close the FOMA phone.
Feedback tone
You can set whether to emit an effect tone for when a
popup is displayed.
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg47.png)
70
Sound/Display
Sound/Display
Setting a Vibrator
C]]
5
Setting items/Setting at purchase >P235
1. From the Sound menu (P67), Vibration settings ]
Select from the following setting items ]After
setting, I[Done]
Incoming call
You can select a vibration pattern for when a voice
call or a video-phone call comes in.
–Pattern1 (Vibration only): This activates the
vibration to pattern 1. Regardless of ring tone, the
tone for incoming call does not sound.
–Pattern2 (Vibration only): This activates the
vibration to pattern 2. Regardless of ring tone, the
tone for incoming call does not sound.
–melody + vibration: The vibration and the melody
for incoming call are activated at the same time.
–OFF: The vibration is not activated in FOMA phone.
Message
You can set a vibration pattern for when mail,
messageR/F or SMS comes in.
–Pattern 1(Vibration only): This activates the
vibration to pattern 1. Regardless of ring tone, the
tone for incoming call does not sound.
–Pattern 2(Vibration only): This activates the
vibration to pattern 2. Regardless of ringtone, the
tone for incoming call does not sound.
–melody + vibration: The vibration and the melody
for incoming call are activated at the same time.
–OFF: The vibration is not activated in FOMA phone.
Activating the Manner Mode
You can set whether to mute the ring tone, key pad sound
and any other sound from the speaker to avoid annoying
people around you. If the manner mode is activated, an
incoming call or alarm, etc. is notified with vibrator.
• You can change the activation on setting manner mode
to “Original manner mode”. >P71
1. From the Stand-by display, press and hold #for
at least two seconds
•
The handset of the FOMA phone vibrates displaying
(blue/in the Original manner mode) or (pink/in
the Manner mode).
• You can cancel it by pressing#for at least two
seconds with the Manner mode activated.
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg48.png)
71
Sound/Display
Sound/Display
Changing Manner Modes
C]]
6
You can change operations in the Manner mode.
Setting at purchase >P235
1. From the Sound menu (P67), “Manner settings” ]
Select from the following setting items
Manner mode
You can set the Manner mode.
Original manner mode
You can customize operations in the Manner mode.
After setting, press I[Done].
–Incoming call sound: You can set whether to
make the ring tone sound when a voice call or
video-phone call comes in.
–Incoming call vib.: You can set whether to vibrate
the phone when a voice call or video-phone call
comes in.
–Message sound: You can set whether to make the
ring tone sound when mail, messageR/F or SMS
comes in.
–Message vibration: You can set whether to vibrate
the phone when mail, messageR/F or SMS comes
in.
–Key tone: You can set whether to make the key
operation sound when you do key operations.
–Flip tone: You can set whether to make an effect
tone sound when you open or close the FOMA
phone.
–Low battery tone: You can set whether to make a
battery alarm tone sound when the battery is flat.
Information
• The following sounds are emitted even when the manner
mode is activated.
– The shutter tone on shooting still and moving image. >P104
– The alert tone for disconnecting a call. >P46, P48
– The alert tone to reconnect >P82
– The alert tone for the quality of calling >P83
• If you try to play the melody, moving image or i-motion on
manner mode, the confirmation screen appears and you can
select whether to play with sounds.
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg49.png)
72
Sound/Display
Sound/Display
*You need to obtain a miniSD memory card separately to use the functions related to the miniSD memory card. >P166
Setting Ringing Operations for Incoming Mail
C]]
7
You can set whether to make the ring tone sound when
mail or SMS comes in. You can also set ringing duration
and cycle of rings.
Setting items/Setting at purchase >P235
1. From the Sound menu (P67), “Mail ring duration” ]
Select from the following setting items ]After
setting, I[Done]
Mail ring ON/OFF
You can set whether to make the ring tone sound
when mail comes in. If you select “ON”, you can set
the ringing duration or cycle of ringing.
Mail ring duration
You can set ringing time and number of rings for the
ringing tone.
–Time: After select Sec. section by pressing D, you
can enter duration of ringing.
–Cycle: After select Cycle section by pressing D,
you can enter the number of cycle.
Setting Ringing Time
C]]
8
You can specify the mute time in seconds before ringing
starts when a voice call or video-phone call which is not
registered in phonebook comes in. This function is effective
as a countermeasure for nuisance calls such as one ring
phone scam.
Setting items/Setting at purchase >P235
1. From the Sound menu (P67), Select “Set mute
seconds” ]Enter ring time. ]I[Done]
Information
• If the voice call or video-phone call which are not registered in
phonebook disconnects within the setting ringing time, they are
not recorded in received call list.
Setting Main Screen
You can set the display for stand-by display or
Incoming/outgoing screen as Main display.
You can set the maximum of the image size of 1280 x
1024 and the file size of 500 KB on the Stand-by display.
Depending on the image, some cannot be set properly.
• You cannot set the image in miniSD memory card.
• When the image saved in stand-by mode, making and
receiving a call at purchase, please refer to “Pre-installed
data” (P248)
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg4a.png)
73
Sound/Display
Sound/Display
Setting the Stand-by Display
C]]
11
You can set wallpapers and clock displays for the Stand-
by display.
Setting items/Setting at purchase >P235, P236
1. From the Display Menu (P67), “Main display” ]
“Stand-by display” ]Select from the following
setting items ]After setting, I[Done]
Clock type
You can set the display format of the clock in Stand-
by mode. If you set it to “Dual clock”, you can view
the time of two cities at the same time.
Wallpaper 1
You can set wallpaper to be displayed on the Stand-
by display.
• Select an image saved on “My picture” of “Data
box”. >P154
Clock font color 2
You can set the clock font color of the clock display.
Clock1 3
The city name (Tokyo) is displayed. This is a city name
of clock displayed in Stand-by screen. You cannot
change the city name in this mode.
Clock2 3
If you set “Dual clock”, this menu is displayed. You
can set the clock of another city.
1: If “Clock type” is set to “Theme1”, “Theme2”, “Theme 3”.
“Theme 4”, this menu is not displayed.
2: If “Clock type” is set to “Small digital”, this menu is displayed.
3: If “Clock type” is set to “Dual clock”, this menu is displayed.
Information
• If you press M[View], you can confirm the display set.
• If you want to change from “Tokyo” to the other city, go to
“Using World time” (P178).
Setting the Display for Incoming Calls
C]]
12
You can set the image displayed when you receive an
incoming call.
Setting items/Setting at purchase >P236
1. From the Display Menu (P67), “Main display” ]
“Incoming call”
•
Select from the images saved on “My picture” of “Data
box”.
>
P154
Setting Display for Outgoing Calls
C]]
13
You can set the image displayed when you make a call.
Setting items/Setting at purchase >P236
1. From the Display Menu ]“Main display” ]
“Outgoing call” (P67)
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg4b.png)
74
Sound/Display
Sound/Display
*You need to obtain a miniSD memory card separately to use the functions related to the miniSD memory card. >P166
•
Select from the images saved on “My picture” of “Data
box”.
>
P154
Setting Sub Display
You can set images of the stand-by display for Sub
display and displays for incoming and outgoing calls. You
can set the maximum of the image size of 1280 x 1024
and the file size of 500 KB on the stand-by display.
Depending on the image, some cannot be set properly.
• You can set the image in miniSD memory card as a
wallpaper when making/ receiving a call.
• When the image saved in stand-by mode, making and
receiving a call at purchase, see “Pre-installed data at
purchase” (P248)
Setting Stand-by Display
C]]
21
You can set wallpapers and clock displays on the Stand-
by display.
Setting items/Setting at purchase >P236
1. From the Display Menu (P67), “Sub display” ]
“Stand-by display” ]Select from the following
setting items ]After setting, I[Done]
Clock type
You can set the display format for the clock.
Wallpaper
You can set the wallpaper to be displayed on the
Stand-by display.
•
Select from the images saved on “My picture” of “Data
box”.
>
P154
Clock font color
You can set the font color of the clock display.
: If “Clock type” is set to “Small digital”, this menu is displayed.
Information
• You can view the screen after setting by pressing M[View].
Setting Display for Incoming Calls
C]]
22
You can set the image to be displayed when you receive a
call.
Setting items/Setting at purchase >P236
1. From Display Menu (P67), “Sub display” ]
“Incoming call”
•
Select from the images saved on “My picture” of “Data
box”.
>
P154
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg4c.png)
75
Sound/Display
Sound/Display
Setting the Display for Outgoing Calls
C]]
23
You can change the image to be displayed when you
make a call.
Setting items/Setting at purchase >P236
1. From Display Menu, “Sub display” ]“Outgoing
call” (P67)
•
Select from the images saved on “My picture” of “Data
box”.
>
P154
Setting Fonts of Dial Characters
C]]
3
You can set the sizes and colors of the dial fonts
displayed when you make a call, etc.
Setting items/Setting at purchase >P236
1. From the Display Menu (P67), “Font” ]Select from
the following setting items ]After setting,
I[Done].
Dial font size
Select a size of dial fonts.
Dial font color
Select a color of dial fonts.
Setting Menu Style
C]]
4
You can set the style of the Menu Style that appears when
pressing C[Menu] on the Stand-by display.
Setting items/Setting at purchase >P236
1. From the Display Menu (P67), “Menu style” ]
“Grid”/“List” ]I[Done]
Setting Backlight
C]]
5
You can set the lighting duration of the Main screen, Sub
display or buttons.
Setting items/Setting at purchase >P236, P237
1. From the Display Menu (P67), “Backlight” ]Select
from the following setting items =>After setting,
I[Done].
Main display
Set the lighting duration of the Main screen.
Sub display
Set the lighting duration of the Sub display.
Keypad
Set the lighting duration of the buttons.
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg4d.png)
76
Sound/Display
Sound/Display
Setting color Scheme
C]]
6
You can set the color scheme of the Main screen.
Setting items/Setting at purchase >P237
1. From the Display Menu (P67), “Color scheme” ]
Select the color scheme you want to set ]I
[Done].
Information
• If you press C[View], you can view the screen after setting.
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg4e.png)
77
Call/Answer ............................................78
Call Feature ............................................82
Video Phone ...........................................84
Date & Time ............................................86
Network (for overseas use) ....................87
Changing a Host from i-mode ...............89
Security...................................................90
Language................................................91
Others Settings.......................................92
Settings
On the Stand-by display,
C[Menu] ]or “Settings”
To display the Settings menu
1 Call/ Answer
2 Call feature
3 Video-phone
4 Date & Time
5 Network
6 Host selection
7 Security
Select
Settings
Select
Settings
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg4f.png)
78
Settings
Call/Answer
Checking Call History
Displaying Received Call Records
C]]
111
You can view the record of received call.
1. From the Settings menu (P77), “Call/Answer” ]
“Call history” ] “Received calls”
<Received Calls>
•A/T: You can make a call to the other party of
the record being recorded.
•I[Delete]: You can delete the record being selected.
2. Select a call record ]C
<Detail>
•A/T: You can make a call to the other party in a
list.
•I[Delete]: You can delete the list of call record.
•J: You can view the call record.
Using the Submenu of the Received Calls screen/
Details screen
1. From the Received Calls screen (See left)/Detail
screen (See above), M[Menu] ] Select from the
following submenu items
View 1
You can view details of the call record selected.
Add to phonebook 2
You can register a new phonebook.
Recv. Calls (1/26)
Menu Delete
[Date]
[Time]
[duration]
DoCoMo Ichiro
Recv. Calls (1/26)
Menu View Delete
DoCoMo Taro
DoCoMo Taro
DoCoMo Ichiro
DoCoMo Jiro
DoCoMo Saburo
This list will be displayed when the
phone number in a list are registered
in phonebook list. You can view the
list by pressing J.
Settings
Icon Description
Received voice calls
Received video-phone calls
Rejected calls
Missed calls (Voice calls)
Missed calls (Video-phone calls)
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg50.png)
79
Settings
Settings
Send mail 3
The mail address stored in the phonebook is entered
into the Address. Go to step 3 (P139) of “Composing i-
mode mail message”.
Delete
You can delete the call record selected on display.
Delete all 1
You can delete all the call records.
Go to list 4
You can return to the screen of received call list.
1: Not selected in sub-menu of detail screen.
2: Not selected if information on the caller of the call record
selected is stored in the phonebook.
3: Not selected if information on the caller of the call record
selected is not stored in the phonebook.
4: Selected in sub-menu of detail screen.
Displaying Redial Items (Dialed Call Records)
C]]
112
You can view dialed call records.
1. From the Settings menu (P77), “Call/Answer” ]
“Call history” ] “Redial”
• The Redial display appears.
2. Select Redial ]C
• The Details display appears.
Information
• See “Using the Submenu of Received Calls Screen”/“Using
the Submenu of the Detailed Screen” (P78) for the display
operation method and the submenus available from the Redial
display/Detail screen.
Displaying All Call Records
C]]
113
Received and dialed call records are displayed together.
1. From the Settings menu (P77), “Call/Answer” ]
“Call history” ] “All calls”
• The All calls screen appears.
2. Select a history ]C
• The Detail screen appears.
Information
• See “Using the Submenu of Received Call Records
Screen” / “Using the Submenu of the Detailed Screen”
(P78) for the display operation method and the submenus
available from the All Calls screen / Detail screen.
Mark Description
Dialed voice calls
Dialed video-phone calls
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg51.png)
80
Settings
Settings
Displaying Call Time
C]]
12
You can confirm call duration for each call type. You can
confirm the following items:
• The displayed call duration is a standard. The real of call
duration can be different.
1. From the Settings menu (P77), “Call/Answer” ]
“Call duration”
• Call duration display appears.
Last call
You can confirm the last call duration.
Received calls
You can confirm the received call duration.
Redial calls
You can confirm the dialed call duration.
All calls
You can confirm the total call duration.
Information
• If the display of call time is over “9999999:59:59”, the setting
will be back to “00:00:00”.
Resetting call duration
1. Select a call duration you want to clear on the Call
duration screen (See above) ]I[Reset] ]Enter
your terminal security code ]C]“Yes”
• To clear all the call durations ]M[Menu] ] “Reset
all”
Setting Earphone/Microphone Auto Answer
C]]
13
You can set how to answer an incoming call with the Flat-
plug Earphone/Microphone Set with Switch (option)
connected.
Setting item/Setting at purchase >P237
1. From the Settings menu (P77), “Call/Answer” ]
“Auto answer” ] Select from the following setting
items >After setting, I[Done]
Auto answering
You can set the earphone/microphone auto answer to
ON/OFF.
Delayed time (0–120 SEC)
You can set the time between receiving call and
answering a call automatically.
Information
• If you use the Flat-plug Earphone/Microphone Set with Switch
(option), you can answer a voice call or video-phone call by
pressing the switch of the earphone only.
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg52.png)
81
Settings
Settings
Next Page
Setting to Reject/Accept Incoming Calls
C]]
14
You can set whether to reject incoming calls.
Setting item/Setting at purchase >P237
1. From the Settings menu (P77), “Call/Answer” ]
“Reject/Accept call” ] Enter your terminal
security code ]C
• The Reject/Accept call display appears.
2. Select from the following setting items
Accept
You can set whether to accept all incoming calls.
Reject on list
You can reject the incoming call from the specific
other party. You can set the party's phone number to
reject a call by pressing I[Setup] (See below).
Reject all calls
–Silent : You can disable the ringing tone for all
incoming calls.
–Disconnect call : You can reject all incoming calls.
Information
•When rejecting a call by “Reject on list” or “Reject all calls”, the
record will be remained.
Setting Reject call List
1. From the Reject/Accept call display (See left),
Select “Reject on list” ] I[Setup]
• The icons of call reject on a list will be displayed.
•M[Menu]: You can edit/delete the list set.
2. I[Add] ]Select from the following setting items
]After setting, I[Done]
Reject types
–Silent : Disables the ring tone when receiving the
call from the other party set to “Reject number”.
–Disconnect call : Rejects incoming calls when
receiving the call from the other party set to “Reject
number”.
Reject number
Enter the phone number of a caller you want to reject.
You can select a phone number from the phonebook
by pressing C[Search]. If you press , you can select
the phone number from the phonebook.
: If you use M[Menu] >Edit from the reject on list. you cannot
use the function.
Mark Description
The type of reject call is set “Silent”.
The type of reject call is set “Disconnect call”.
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg53.png)
82
Settings
Settings
Setting Memory Reject Call
C]]
15
You can set whether to reject calls from callers whose
phone numbers are not registered in the phonebook or
not being informed the Caller ID.
Setting item/Setting at purchase >P237
1. From the Settings menu (P77), “Call/Answer” ]
“Memory reject call” ]“ON”/“OFF”
Setting an Answer Mode
C]]
16
You can set whether to answer a voice call by pressing a
button other thanA
Setting item/Setting at purchase >P237
1. From the Settings menu (P77), “Call/Answer” ]
”Answer mode” ]Select from the following
setting items
Press send key
You can answer a call by pressing Aonly.
Open flip
You can answer a call by opening the FOMA phone. If
the FOMA phone is open already, you can answer a
call by A.
Press any key
You can answer a call by pressing any key except for
M,I,FE,G.
Information
• This setting is not available for video phone call.
Call Feature
Setting the Reconnect Control
C]]
21
You can set whether to make an alarm sound to inform
you when you are reconnected immediately after
disconnected owing to bad radio wave conditions.
Setting item/Setting at purchase >P237
1. From the Settings menu (P77), “Call feature” ]
”Reconnect alarm” ]Select from the following
setting items
High alarm
Set high alarm sounds.
Low alarm
Set Low alarm sounds.
No alarm
No sound.
Information
• The time to reconnect the network can be different depending
on the status of phone or radio. (the maximum 10 seconds)
• The duration to reconnect the network can be chargeable.
• Depending on the status of phone or radio, the alarm may not
sound, and then disconnect it.
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg54.png)
83
Settings
Settings
Next Page
Setting Quality Alarm
C]]
22
You can set whether to make an alarm sound to inform
you when a call is liable to be disconnected midway
because of bad radio wave conditions.
Setting item/Setting at purchase >P238
1. From the Settings menu (P77), “Call feature” ]
“Quality alarm” ]Select from the following
setting items
High alarm
Set high alarm sounds.
Low alarm
Set low alarm sounds.
No alarm
No sound.
Setting Minute Reminder
C]]
23
You can check the call duration by beep sound every
minute during a voice call. (Not support this function for
Video-phone call)
Setting item/Setting at purchase >P238
1. From the Settings menu (P77), “Call feature” ]
“Minute reminder” ]“ON”/“OFF”
Information
• This setting is not available with a video-phone call.
Setting Prefix Dial
C]]
24
You can store prefix numbers such as international access
code or “#31# / 31#” and add it to the beginning of the
phone number to dial.
Setting item/Setting at purchase >P238
1. From the Settings menu (P77), “Call feature” ]
“Prefix dial”
• The Prefix Dial screen appears.
2. Select a PREFIX field to enter ]Enter a number ]
I[Done]
Setting International Dial
Setting Auto assist
C]]
251
You can set whether to automatically replace “+´” at the
beginning of a phone number with an international access
code such as “009130010” for making an international call.
Setting item/Setting at purchase >P238
1. From the Settings menu (P77), “Call feature” ]
“International dial” ]“Auto assist setting” ]
“Auto”/“OFF”
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg55.png)
84
Settings
Settings
Setting IDD prefix
C]]
252
You can set the international access code to be added to
the beginning of a phone number for making an
international call.
Setting item/Setting at purchase >P238
1. From the Settings menu (P77), “Call feature” ]
“International dial” ]“IDD prefix setting” ]Select
from the following setting items ]After setting,
I[Done]
IDD prefix name
Enter the name of an international call service.
IDD prefix code
Enter an international access code.
Setting Close setting
C]]
26
You can set how the FOMA phone works when it is
folded.
Setting item/Setting at purchase >P238
1. From the Settings menu (P77), “Call feature” ]
“Close setting” ]Select from the following setting
items
End the call
The call is disconnected.
Continue(Mute)
The microphone is mute during Continue (Mute) call.
This function is available for only voice call.
Information
• During video-phone call, if you close the flip, the call will be
ended regardless of this setting.
Video-Phone
You can change settings for the video-phone operation
and display.
Changing the Video-Phone Settings
C]]
31
You can set how the FOMA phone works and screens
when making a video-phone call.
Setting item/Setting at purchase >P238
1. From the Settings menu (P77), “Video-phone” ]
“Video-phone settings” ]Select from the
following setting items ]After setting, I[Done]
VoiceCall AutoSwitch
Sets (ON/ OFF) whether to redial by automatically
switching to a voice call if the other party is unable to
answer a video-phone call.
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg56.png)
85
Settings
Settings
Next Page
Display setting
You can set how to display the Talking screen.
–Both : Your image and the other party’s image are
displayed.
–Other : Only the other party’s image is displayed.
–Me : Only your image is displayed.
Sub screen
You can set an image to be displayed on the sub
screen when “Display setting for video phone call” is
set to “Both”.
–Me : Your image is displayed.
–Other : The other party’s image is displayed.
Send camera image
You can set whether to send your image to the other
party. If set to “OFF”, a substitute image is sent to the
other party.
Sending img. quality
–Prefer image quality : Sends images laying stress
on image quality. Prefer image quality is effective if
there is little motion.
–Normal : Sends images in standard quality and
motion speed.
–Prefer motion quality : Sends images laying stress
on motion speed. Prefer motion speed is effective
for moving images.
Display light
–Always on : Keeps the display lit during a call.
–Terminal setting : Follows the settings of the
“Backlight” of the “Main display”. >P75
Selecting a Video-phone Image
Changing Substitutive images
C]]
321
You can set a substitute image to send in place of your
own image during a video-phone call.
Setting item/Setting at purchase >P238
1. From the Settings menu (P77), “Video-phone” ]
“Image settings” ]“Substitutive image” ]Select
from the following setting items ]After setting,
I[Done]
Image
–Default Image : The image by default.
–Selected image : You can select an image other
than the default image from the “Image list”.
Image list
You can select an image for when “Image” is set to
“Selected image”. Select from images stored in “My
picture” of “Data box”. >P154
Changing Response Hold Image
C]]
322
You can set an image to display when you put the call on
hold during ringing of a video-phone call.
Setting item/Setting at purchase >P238
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg57.png)
86
Settings
Settings
1. From the Settings menu (P77), “Video-phone” ]
”Image settings” ]”Response hold image”
• See “Changing Substitutive image” (P85) for the
subsequent operations.
Changing On-hold Images
C]]
323
You can set an image to display when you put the call on
hold during ringing of a video-phone call.
Setting item/Setting at purchase >P238,P239
1. From the Settings menu (P77), “Video phone” ]
“Image settings” ]“On-hold image”
• See “Changing Substitutive image” (P85) for the
subsequent operations.
Date & Time
Setting Time
C]]
41
You can set the time of city which is already set “Home”
(the city at purchase: Tokyo) by “World time”. (P178)
Setting item/Setting at purchase >P239
1. From the Settings menu (P77), Select “Date &
Time” ]“Set time” ]Select from the following
setting items ]After setting, I[Done]
Set time
Press Jto select an input item (hour, minute,
second, am/pm ). Use the numeric keys to enter
numbers. Press Cto switch between am/pm .
Time format
You can set whether to display time in the 12-hour
format or in the 24-hour format.
Hour indication
You can set whether the alarm will sound or not after
setting (00 min). You can select the ring tone as an
alarm. If you don't want this indication, set “OFF”.
: Displayed if “Time format” is set to “12-hour”.
Setting Date
C]]
42
You can set the date.
Setting item/Setting at purchase >P239
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg58.png)
87
Settings
Settings
1. From the Settings menu (P77) ]Select “Date &
Time” ]“Set date” ]Select from the following
setting items ]After setting, I[Done]
Set date
Press Jto select an input item (year, month, date).
Use the numeric keys to enter numbers.
Date format
You can change display formats of the date.
(DD/MM/YYYY, MM/DD/YYYY, YYYY/MM/DD)
: YYYY stands for Year, MM stands for Month, and DD stands for
Day.
Setting Daylight Saving
C]]
43
You can set daylight saving time.
Setting item/Setting at purchase >P239
1. From the Settings menu (P77), “Date & Time” ]
“Daylight saving” ]“ON”/“OFF”
Information
• The country applying to the Summer time by using “World time”
(P178) is set as a home. After setting, it is displayed in Summer
time.
Network (for overseas use)
Selecting the Network Connection Mode
C]]
51
You can select a network setting method in case
destination networks (Communication carriers) change for
overseas use, etc.
Setting item/Setting at purchase >P239
1. From the Settings menu (P77), “Network” ]
“Network selection” ]Select from the following
setting items
Auto
Automatically searches for the network for setting.
Manual
The network search display appears, allowing you to
select a network from the list displayed after search.
Information
• It may take a few minutes to find the network.
• If you set “Auto”, you can search the network automatically in the
situation as follow.
– When you switch on – Out of service area
• If you stop searching the network manually, the setting will be
changed to “Auto”.
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg59.png)
88
Settings
Settings
Setting the Network Mode
C]]
52
You can set a type of network to search for when networks
are searched according to “Network selection”.
Setting item/Setting at purchase >P239
1. From the Settings menu (P77), “Network” ]
“Network mode” ]Select from the following
setting items
Auto
Searches all the networks connectable.
WCDMA only
Searches only networks supporting 3G.
GSM only
Searches only networks supporting GSM/GPRS.
Information
• You cannot exchange the data through packet service under
GSM network.
Registering a Network of Preferred list
C]]
53
Adding Networks
If the network is searching automatically, you can add a
preferable network (communication carrier) to be
connected to.
Setting item/Setting at purchase >P239
1. From the Settings menu (P77), “Network” ]
“Preferred lists”
2. M[Menu] ]Select from the following setting
items
•I[Delete]: You can delete the network selected.
Search network
You can select from the network list stored in the
FOMA phone for adding.
Enter new network
You can enter the country code (MCC) and the
network code (MNC) for adding. After setting, press
I[Done].
Delete
You can delete the selected network.
Move up
You can move the selected network upward. The
network which is moved upward is preferred.
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg5a.png)
89
Settings
Settings
Move down
You can move the selected network downward. The
network placed downward is preferred.
: If you register multiple networks, you can use this menu.
Information
• If the network is not registered, [Menu], [Delete] of soft key
area on list to register will not be displayed. To add new
network, press I[Add].
• The registered data is saved in FOMA card.
Displaying the Network Name
C]]
54
You can set whether to display the name of the network
currently set on the Stand-by display.
Setting item/Setting at purchase >P239
1. From the Settings menu (P77), “Network” ]
“Network name display” ]“Display on”/“Display
off”
Changing a Host from i-mode
Setting / Changing the Host
C]]
6
Normally, you do not need to change the setting.
You can set a host to use services of various providers
other than i-mode. If the host is changed, i-mode
becomes unavailable.
Setting item/Setting at purchase >P239
1. From the Settings menu (P77), “Host selection” ]
From the Host selection screen, I[Add] ]Enter
your terminal security code ]C]Set the
following items ]After setting, I[Done]
• The host set is displayed on the Host selection
screen with attached to it.
Host name
Enter the name displayed on the Host selection
screen.
Host address
Enter the address of the host.
Access point
Enter the Access point (URL, etc.).
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg5b.png)
90
Settings
Settings
Information
• To switch the host back to “i-Mode” or to switch to another
host, select “i-Mode”/other hosts and press Con the Host
selection screen.
• If you press M[Menu] on the Host selection screen, you can
edit / delete / display the host set. Note that you cannot edit /
delete pre-installed “i-Mode”.
• In Access point menu, you should enter IP address in PDP
type.
Security
Setting All Lock
C]]
71
You can set whether to lock requiring to enter the terminal
security code to operate function. During All Lock, “All
lock” is displayed on the Stand-by display.
Setting item/Setting at purchase >P239
1. From the Settings menu (P77), “Security” ]“All
lock” ]Select from the following setting items
Power on
You can set whether to lock the FOMA phone when
you turn of the power. You need to enter your terminal
security code to set it.
Immediate
Sets All lock immediately. You need to enter your
terminal security code to set it.
none
You can release All lock. You need to enter your
terminal security code to release it.
Releasing All Lock
1. Press either one of 1~0]Enter your
terminal security code ]C
•
On the locked display,
I
[Emergency]: You can call
emergency information (110/118/119).
Setting PIN Code Request
C]]
72
You can set to enter PIN1 code when you turn on the
power to the FOMA phone.
Setting item/Setting at purchase >P239
1. From the Settings menu (P77), “Security” ]“PIN
code request” ]“ON”/“OFF” ]Enter PIN1 code ]
C
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg5c.png)
91
Settings
Settings
Next Page
Changing Your Password
Changing the PIN1 code / PIN2 code
C]]
731 /
C]]
732
You can change the PIN1 code / PIN2 code. To change
the PIN1 code, you should set “PIN code request” to
“ON”. The default code is “0000”.
1. From the Settings menu (P77), “Security” ]
“Change password” ]“PIN1 code”/“PIN2 code”
<Change PIN1 code>
2. Enter the current PIN1 code/PIN2 code ]C
3. Enter a new PIN1 code/PIN2 code ]C
4. Enter the same code that you did in Step 3 again ]
C
Information
• If you enter a wrong PIN code over three times, the PIN code
will be locked automatically. If you unlock the PIN code, see
“Preventing the Phone from Activating the Operation of
Function” (P97).
Changing Your Terminal Security Code
C]]
733
You can change your terminal security code.
Setting item/Setting at purchase >P239
1. From the Settings menu (P77), “Security” ]
Change password” ]“Security code”
• For the subsequent steps, just like the steps to change
the PIN1 code / PIN2 code, enter your current terminal
security code, enter a new terminal security code and
then enter the same code again for confirmation.
C]]
8
You can switch the languages of the FOMA phone
between Japanese and English.
Setting item/Setting at purchase >P240
1. From the Settings menu (P77), “ ”]
“”/“English”
Current PIN1 code. R:3
New PIN1 code
Verify PIN1 code
Change PIN1 code
The remaining time to enter
PIN is available
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg5d.png)
92
Settings
Settings
*You need to obtain a miniSD memory card separately to use the functions related to the miniSD memory card. >P166
Information
• This setting is registered in FOMA phone and FOMA card
which is inserted now. If you insert other FOMA card which
registered other settings, the settings of FOMA card will be
preferred.
Others Settings
Checking the Memory Status
C]]
91
You can check the usage status and available space of the
memories of the handset of the FOMA phone and the
miniSD memory card.
1. From the Settings menu (P77), “Others” ]“Memory
status” ]Select from the following items
Common memory
You can check the empty or the reseved capacity
(Standard) of the common memory in which data such
as My picture, i-motion, Melody are stored.
Reserved memory
You can check the empty or the reserved capacity of the
common memory in which data for Phonebook,
Schedule, Memo, Date counter are stored.
UIM memory
You can check the empty or the reseved capacity
(Standard) of the common memory in which data for
“Phonebook”, “SMS”.
miniSD
You can check the empty or reserved capacity of
miniSD memory card.
Resetting the Settings
Clearing the Memory
C]]
921
You can clear all the data recorded in the handset of the
FOMA phone and the miniSD memory card.
1. From the Settings menu (P77), “Others” ]“Reset
settings” ]“Clear memory” ]Select from the
following items
• You need to enter your terminal security code for
deleting.
Handset contents
Clears all the data saved in the Data box folder of the
FOMA phone.
Handset personal info.
Clears all the personal data saved in the FOMA phone
such as phonebooks, schedule, call history and so on.
miniSD
Clears all the data saved in the minisd folder of the
miniSD memory card.
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg5e.png)
93
Settings
Settings
Initializing the Default Settings
C]]
922
You can reset to all settings at purchase except for
“i-mode setting” and “Mail setting”.
1. From the Settings menu (P77), “Others” ]“Reset
settings” ]Default settings “Yes” ]Enter the
terminal security code ]Press C
Information
•When you reset the date and time, you cannot play span/
period restricted i-motion file.
Changing the Settings for the SMS Center
C]]
93
Normally, you do not need to change the settings.
You can change the SMS centers to use.
Setting item/Setting at purchase >P240
1. From the Settings menu (P77), “Others” ]“SMS
center” ]“Select from the following setting items
]After setting, I[Done]
SMSC
–DoCoMo : You can use the DoCoMo SMS center.
–Others : You can use another company’s SMS
center.
Address
If “SMSC” is set to “others”, you can enter the
address of the SMS center.
Resetting the holiday
C]]
94
You can reset all settings of holiday of FOMA phone to
settings at purchase.
1. From the Settings menu (P77), “Others” ]“Reset
holiday” ]“Yes”
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg5f.png)
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg60.png)
95
Passwords ..............................................96
Preventing the Phone from
Activating the Operation of Function ....97
Other Safety Settings.............................98
Safety settings
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg61.png)
Passwords
For some functions of the FOMA, you need to enter
your password. In addition to the Terminal security
Code for operating respective mobile phone functions,
the Network Security Code to use network services,
and i-mode password are available. These passwords
help you utilize your FOMA phone.
Information for Passwords
• Do not use the easy-to-decipher figures such as
“Birthday”, “the part of phone number”, “Area code or
Room number”, “1111”, “1234” to prevent it from
being known by others. Note that you make a memo
to set the password.
• Make sure that prevent the password from being
known by others. If the password is known by third
party, NTT DoCoMo will not have any other
responsibility concerning the mischief or the mis-use of
handset.
• There is no request the client's password from NTT
DoCoMo.
• Note that if you do not remember password, you need
to bring an identification card such as a driver's
license, FOMA handset, FOMA card to a handling
counter such as a DoCoMo shop. For details, consult
"DoCoMo Information Center" described on the back
page of the manual.
Terminal security code
The terminal security code is set “0000” at purchase. You
can change the terminal security code. To change the
code, see “Changing Your Terminal Security Code” (P91).
Network Password
The Network Security Code is a four-digit number required for
using various network services and for various procedures at
the “ e” (DoCoMo e-site). The security code is
determined at the time of contract. The user has an ID and a
password of “My DoCoMo” which is the integrated support
site for PC can change new network password through PC.
In addition, you can change various procedures of DoCoMo
e-site in i-mode.
For “My DoCoMo”, “DoCoMo e-site”, see the cover of this
manual.
i-mode Password
The i-mode password is a four-digit password required for
registering, deleting My-menu, Messaging service, applying
for or cancelling an i-mode password. (The service provider
can supply its own password.)
The default for i-mode password is “0000”, but you can
change it. If you change the password from i-mode, see
“Changing i-mode Password” (P126).
96
Safety settings
Safety settings
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg62.png)
97
Safety settings
Safety settings
PIN1 code/PIN2 code
For the FOMA card, you can set the two security code,
namely the PIN1 code and PIN2 code. The default for
these security code is “0000”, but you can change these
codes as you lock. To change the codes, see “Setting
PIN Code Request” (P90), “Changing the PIN1 code /
PIN2 code” (P91).
aPIN1 Code
The PIN1 code is the four- to eight-digit code for checking
the user each time the UIM is inserted into the FOMA
phone or each time the FOMA phone is turned on so that
you can prevent the third party from using your UIM. If you
enter PIN1 code, you can receive or make a call or
activate the operation.
aPIN2 Code
The PIN2 code is the four-to eight- digit code for using the
user certificate or applying for the issue of it and executing
reset Total Cost.
This FOMA phone does not have this function.
Information
• If you purchase a new FOMA phone and use the existing
FOMA card with new FOMA phone, use PIN1 code and PIN2
code you have set previously.
• If you enter a wrong PIN1 code/ PIN2 code three times in
succession on the display requiring its entry, the PIN1 code/
PIN2 code is locked automatically. To unlock the code, you
need to enter PIN lock release code.
Releasing PIN lock code
PIN lock releasing code is a eight-digit password to
release locking PIN1 code, PIN2 code. You cannot
change it.
Information
• If you enter a wrong "PIN unlock code" 10 times in succession,
it is automatically locked. In case of this, you need to bring the
FOMA phone, UIM and an identification card such as a driver's
license to a handling counter such as a DoCoMo shop.
Preventing the Phone from Activating
the Operation of Function
To protect the information or data in FOMA phone, you
can activate the security function to prevent from
activating the operation or the function.
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg63.png)
98
Safety settings
Setting All Lock
After locking FOMA phone, if you don't enter terminal
password, you cannot activate the phone. To set this
function, see “Setting All Lock” (P90).
Setting not to display mail without
permission
You can set the security function for the Inbox, Outbox,
and Unsent of the Mail menu. To set this function, see
“Display” of “Mail setting” (P145).
Other Safety Settings
The FOMA phone has the following safety settings in
addition to the “Security” function:
Safety settings
Purpose Function/Service
To change the mail
address
To receive/reject mail
sent from i-mode
phones only
To receive mail from
specified domains
(company) only
To reject mail from
specified senders
To reject 200th and
succeeding i-mode
messages sent from a
single i-mode phone on
the same day
To reject unsolicited Ad
mail
To reject SMS
reception
To store/check safety
information when a
disaster occurs
To stop the mail
function temporarily
To check the settings
for the mail function
Change mail address
Receive/Reject i-mode
mail only
Receive from specified
domain
Receive Selected
Mail/Reject Selected Mail
Selected Mail Senders
Reject unsolicited Ad
mail/Reject mail
Se/Confirm SMS
Rejection Settings
i-mode Disaster
Message Board Service
Suspend Mail
Confirm Settings
Confirm Settings
Reference
Refer to
“i-mode
User’s
Manual”
Purpose Function/Service
To reject calls from
specified callers
To receive calls from callers
registered in the phonebook
Not to take nuisance
calls
Not to take calls from
callers not notifying caller ID
To receive necessary
mail only
Reject/Accept call
Memory reject call
Nuisance call barring
Caller ID request
Receive option
Reference
P81
P82
P194
P194
P143
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg64.png)
99
Notes for when using the camera.............100
Using the Camera ......................................101
Taking Still Images.....................................101
Shooting Moving Images...........................106
Multimedia (Camera)
1 Camera-mode
2 Movie-mode
Select
Multimedia
On the Stand-by display,
C[Menu] ]or “Multimedia”
To display the Multimedia menu
Select
Multimedia
Multimedia
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg65.png)
*You need to obtain a miniSD memory card separately to use the functions related to the miniSD memory card. >P166
100
Multimedia (Camera)
Notes for when using the camera
• If the lens is stained with finger prints or something oily,
you cannot shoot clear images. Clean the lens with a
soft cloth before shooting images.
• If the lens is exposed to direct sunlight for a long time,
the color filter inside and images may be discolored.
• If shooting or saving images after leaving the FOMA
phone in a warm place for a long time, image quality
may deteriorate.
• Do not cover the lens with fingers, etc. when shooting
images.
• When the battery level is low, you can't activate camera
and movie mode.
• If you shoot a fast moving subject, it may be recorded a
little off the displayed position.
• Be careful not to move your hands when taking a shot.
Hold the FOMA phone securely with your hands so that
it does not move, or place the FOMA phone in a stable
place and use the self timer when taking a shot.
• If you move your hands when shooting a moving image
or if you shoot a rapidly moving image, the image may
be blurred.
• If you try to directly shoot a strong illuminant such as
the sun and a lamp, the image may become dim or
blurred.
• The camera has been made with highly precise
technologies, and there may be points and lines that
always look bright as well as pixels and lines that
always look dim. Also, acknowledge that when
shooting an image in a place where light intensity is
small, it looks a little rough, and noises such as white
lines increase.
• If the storage location is set to the miniSD memory
card, do not pull out the miniSD memory card while
you are using the camera. Malfunction of the FOMA
phone may result.
• If the battery is flat, you are not able to save still or
moving shot images.
• Since the camera consumes electric power quickly, do
not operate the camera for a long time or leave it for a
long time.
• It may take a long time until images are displayed on
the shooting display after starting the camera
depending on the settings.
• Images shot by the cameras might differ from actual
subjects in color tone and brightness.
• To protect from taking a picture without informing, the
shutter tone will be sounded on manner mode. Also,
even when the Flat-plug Earphone/Microphone Set
with Switch (option) is attached to the FOMA phone,
the shutter sound is emitted from the speaker.
Multimedia (Camera)
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg66.png)
101
Multimedia (Camera)
Multimedia (Camera)
Next Page
Copyrights and Rights of Portrait
You have no right to copy, modify, or distribute the
contents of which a third party holds the copyright such
as text, images, music, or software downloaded from web
pages on the Internet, or images shot by the cameras of
this product without permission from the copyright holder
except for when the copy or quote is for personal use that
is allowed by the Copyright Law. Note that it may be
prohibited to shoot or record live performances or
exhibitions even for personal use. Make sure that you
refrain from taking portraits of other persons and
distributing such portraits over the Internet without
consent, as this violates portrait rights.
Using the Camera
You can adjust the angle of camera on setting the scene
of a person, an landscape or a portrait.
Information
• If you shoot an image by adjusting the lens within the FOMA
phone as shown, the image is saved as Mirror.
Taking Still Images
C]]
1
You can take still images. The taken still images are saved
into the “Camera” folder of “My picture” in “Data box” of
the FOMA phone. You can set the storage location to the
miniSD memory card. If you set the storage location to the
miniSD memory card, the taken still images are saved into
"My picture”. To save the images, you can se t“Save to”
(P104).
Adjust the angle by
rotating a camera to
an arrow direction.
Lens
Please respect the privacy of individuals around you when
taking and sending photos using camera-equipped
mobile phones.
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg67.png)
102
Multimedia (Camera)
Multimedia (Camera)
*You need to obtain a miniSD memory card separately to use the functions related to the miniSD memory card. >P166
1. In Stand-by mode, press G
<Still Image Finder Stand-by>
•H/FE: You can set the magnification of the image.
•J: You can change the brightness of the image.
•I
[Album]: You can view the “Camera” folder of “My
picture”.
2. After confirming the subject, C
<Still image shooting End>
•I
[Mail]: You can compose the message with
attaching the image. Go to step 2 on page 139 of
“Composing i-mode mail”.
•C
[OK]: You can save the image.
•M
[Menu] : You can delete the picture in sub-menu.
>P105
After taking a multishot
After taking a multishot (P103), you can view the display as
follow.
<Screen multishot shooting End>
•C[View
]
: You can use a zooming in the selected file.
•I
[Mail]: You can compose i-mode mail with attaching the
selected file. Go to step 2 on page 139 of “Composing
i-mode mail”.
•Q: Returns back to Stand-by mode to take a picture.
Camera
Menu View Mail
The file size of selected one
Menu OK Mail
SavedSaved
Menu Rec. Album
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg68.png)
103
Multimedia (Camera)
Multimedia (Camera)
Next page
Icons on the Still Image Finder Stand-by Screen
• Indicates the status of the still image shot setting.
1: The remaining number of shots varies depending on the
settings of shooting. (The value is for a reference.)
2 : The value varies depending on the value set.
Using the Sub Menus of the Still Image
Finder Stand-by Screen
You can set up functions to take still images.
Setting item/Setting at purchase >P242
1. From the Finder Stand-by display (P102), M[Menu]
]Select from the following submenu items by
using
J
]After setting, C]I[Close]
(Size)
You can set the photo size.
(Quality)
You can set the image quality to store shots of still
images.
(Light)
You can set the radiation method of flash when taking
a shot.
–OFF : Does not flash
–Auto : Automatically flashes according to the
shooting conditions such as when shooting in a
dark place
–Always on : Always lights while the camera is on
–When taking : Always flashes when pushing the
shutter regardless of the brightness of the shooting
location.
DescriptionIcon
Camera mode (Still image shot mode)
Remaining number of shots
Storage
location
Handset memory
OFF
Automatic
Always on
When taking
miniSD
Light
settings
Auto timer
Size
Zoom
Brightness
Multishot
No restriction
100KB
Size
restriction
9KB
Super fine
Fine
Storage
image
quality
setup Normal
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg69.png)
104
Multimedia (Camera)
Multimedia (Camera)
(Multishot)
You can set the number of continuous shots of still
images to be taken by pushing the shutter.
(Zoom)
You can set the magnification of the image.
(Brightness)
You can set brightness (exposure) of the image.
(White balance)
You can revise the color tone for the image. This
setting is for a shot image with an unnatural color
tone.
(Night mode)
This setting is for when taking a shot in a dark place,
etc.
(Frame shot)
This setting is for when taking a shot with a frame
attached to the subject. Select “Choose Frame” and
select a frame using J>Press C.
(Auto timer)
You can set Auto timer. Select the number of seconds
between pressing the shutter and starting taking a
shot.
(Effect)
This setting is for when taking a shot with special
effect applied to the image.
(Shutter sound)
You can set a tone to sound when the shutter is pushed.
• If you select an item, a sample tone sounds.
(Size restriction)
You can limit the size to store shots of still images.
(Flicker tuning)
You can set the frequency to protect from waving the
screen.
(Save to)
You can set the location to store shots of still images.
Information
• If taking a shot with the “size” set to “1280x1024”, you cannot
use the zoom.
• If “Multishot” is set, the “Size” automatically changes to
“320x240”. After setting Multishot off, you cannot change the
size any more.
• If the “Frame shot” is set, the “size” automatically changes to
“176x220”. After the Frame shot, Multishot have been set off,
you cannot change the “Size”.
• You cannot set “Multishot” and “Frame shot” at the same
time.
• If you are unable to store in the size set in “Size restriction”,
automatically lower the resolution to store images.
• If “Size restriction” has been set to “100KB” or “9KB”, you
cannot set up “Quality”.
• If “Size restriction” has been set to “9Kbyte”, you cannot take
images in “Multishot” or “Frame shot”.
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg6a.png)
105
Multimedia (Camera)
Multimedia (Camera)
• If you set Flicker tuning, twinkling will not be removed
completely depending on the environment or the color tone of
actual subject.
• For the frame image stored by default, see “Frame” (P250) in
“Data stored by default”.
Using the submenus of the Still Image
Shooting End Screen
Setting item/Setting at purchase >P243
1. From the Still Image Shooting End Screen (P102) /
Multishot Shooting End Screen (P102), M[Menu]
]Select from the following submenu items
New picture
The Finder screen returns.
Mark/Unmark
You can delete the file which was shot by multishot. After
selecting the file, press M[Menu] >“Delete”.
–Mark : You can mark a file at a time.
–Mark all : You can mark all the files collectively.
–Unmark : You can unmark the file marked by
“Mark” or one of the files marked by “Mark all” at a
time.
–Unmark all : You can unmark the file marked by
“Mark” or all the files marked by “Mark all”.
Send via mail
You can attach shots of still images to i-mode mail for
sending. Go to step 2 (P139) of “Composing i-mode
mail message”.
Delete (Selected shot )
You can delete a shot of a still image.
Set as wallpaper
You can select the “Main display” or “Sub display” to
set as wallpaper.
Slide show
–Go : You can display still images shot in Multishot in
order.
–Settings : You can set up “View as” and “Time
interval (secs)” for slide show. After setting, press
I[Done].
Make animated GIF
You can select multiple files to create animation. After
selecting files, press I[Make].
Sort by
You can sort files.
View by
You can change file display methods.
File property
You can display the name, size and type of the file
being selected.
: Displayed only after taking images in Multishot.
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg6b.png)
106
Multimedia (Camera)
Multimedia (Camera)
*You need to obtain a miniSD memory card separately to use the functions related to the miniSD memory card. >P166
Shooting Moving Images
C]]
2
You can shoot moving images. The shot moving images
are saved into the “Camera” folder of “i-motion” in “Data
box” on the handset. You can set the storage location to
the miniSD memory card. To save the image in miniSD
memory card, set icon (P108).
1. From the Multimedia menu (P99) , “Movie-mode”
< Moving Image Finder Stand-by>
•H/FE : You can change the magnification of the
images.
•J: You can change the brightness of the images.
•I
[Album]: You can view the folder of “Camera” in
“i-motion”.
2. After confirming the subject, C
<Moving Image Shooting End>
•H/FE: You can change the magnification of an
image.
•Q: If you press this key on recording, the moving
image is not saved, and return to stand-by mode to
take a picture.
•C[Stop]: Press this key to end the camera.
3. The shooting is ended.
<Moving Image Shooting End>
Menu OK Mail
SavedSaved
Stop
Illuminates in red during shot.
Shot elapsed time/maximum shot time
Shot elapsed time is displayed with a bar.
Menu Rec. Album
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg6c.png)
107
Multimedia (Camera)
Multimedia (Camera)
Next page
•I[Mail]: You can compose i-mode mail with
attaching the selected file. Go to step 2 on page 139
of “Composing i-mode mail”.
•C[OK]: Return to the Moving Image Finder Stand-by
screen.
•M[Menu] : You can delete the picture in sub-menu.
>P105
Icons on the Moving Image Finder Stand-by Screen
• Indicates the status of the moving image shot setting.
• See “Icons on the Still Image Finder Stand-by Screen”
(P103) for other Icons.
Using the Submenu of the Moving Image
Finder stand-by Screen
You can set up functions to shoot moving images.
Setting item/Setting at purchase >P243
1. From the Moving Image Finder Stand-by screen
(P106), M[Menu] ]Select from the following
submenu items by using J]After setting, C]
I[Close]
(Quality)
You can set the image quality to store shots of moving
images.
(Light)
You can set the radiation method of flash when shooting.
–OFF : Does not flash.
–Always on : Always lights while the video camera is
on.
–When recording : Always lights while recording
regardless of the brightness of the shooting location.
(Zoom)
You can set up the magnification of the images.
(Brightness)
You can set up brightness (exposure) of the images.
(White balance)
You can revise the color tone for the images. This setting
is for shot images with an unnatural color tone.
(Night mode)
This setting is for when shooting a shot in a dark
place, etc.
Description
Icon
Light settings (Always on/when recording)
Recording time (for Mail)
Sound+Video
Video only
Sound only
Movie type
Movie mode (Taking a moving image)
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg6d.png)
108
Multimedia (Camera)
Multimedia (Camera)
*You need to obtain a miniSD memory card separately to use the functions related to the miniSD memory card. >P166
(Effect)
This setting is for when shooting a shot with special
effect applied to the image.
(Recording time)
You can set the recording time for moving images.
(Flicker tuning)
You can set the frequency to protect from waving the
screen.
(Save to)
You can set the location to save shots of moving images.
(Type)
You can set whether or not images / sound are
recorded when shooting moving images.
Information
• If “Recording time” is set to “Mail attach”, the recording time
varies according to the “Quality” setting.
• When you set “Recording time” to “60 mins”, you save the
date in miniSD memory card.
• If you set Flicker tuning, twinkling will not be removed
completely depending on the environment or the color tone of
actual subject.
Using the Submenus of Moving Image
Shooting End Screen
1. From the Moving Image Shooting End screen
(P106), M[Menu] ]Select from the following
submenu items
New movie
The Finder screen returns.
Send via mail
You can attach shot moving images to i-mode mail for
sending. Go to step 2 (P139) of “Composing i-mode
mail message”.
Delete
You can delete shot moving images.
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg6e.png)
109
i-mode Menu ........................................110
What is i-mode? ...................................110
Displaying the iMenu display...............110
Displaying Sites from Bookmark .........111
Displaying Screen memo .....................112
Displaying Last URL.............................113
Displaying Internet Web Pages ...........113
Displaying MessageR/F .......................114
Checking Whether Center Holds
MessageR/F .........................................117
Setting Functions of i-mode ................117
Displaying Sites....................................120
How to See/Use Sites ..........................122
Using My Menu ....................................125
Changing i-mode Password ................126
i-mode
Select
On the Stand-by display,
C[Menu] ]or “i-mode”
To display the i-mode menu
Select
i-mode
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg6f.png)
110
i-mode
i-mode
i-mode Menu
The i-mode menu is the basic display for viewing various
sites and Internet web pages. You can use each function of
i-mode from the i-mode menu.
What is i-mode?
i-mode is the online service that makes use of the display
of the i-mode phone to enable you to use convenient
information from i-mode sites (programs) and homepages
supporting i-mode and to exchange mail easily.
• Refer to “i-mode User’s Manual” for details.
• Not all the services described in “i-mode User’s
Manual” are supported. Check the description of the
models supporting each service with “i-mode User’s
Manual”.
Displaying the iMenu display
C]]
1
You can access each i-mode site from iMenu.
1. From the i-mode menu (P109), “iMenu”
•
Refer to “i-mode User’s Manual” for items displayed on
the iMenu display.
• See “Displaying Sites” (P120) for the subsequent
operations.
DescriptionMenu item
Connects to the i-mode Center
Displays your favorite sites and Internet
web pages.
Enter URL to connect to the internet.
Displays pages of sites, etc. saved in the
FOMA phone.
Displays the most recently accessed
site or Internet web page.
Bookmark
Last URL
Displays a list of the received
MessageR/F.
Message
You can set the FOMA functions related
to i-mode.
You can check whether the i-mode
Center holds mail and MessageR/F.
Check new
message
Go to
location
Menu
Screen memo
i-mode
setting
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg70.png)
111
i-mode
i-mode
Displaying Sites from Bookmark
C]]
2
You can directly access your favorite sites from Bookmark.
• For the registration method, see “Using the Submenus
of the Site Screen” (P120).
1. From the i-mode menu (P109), “Bookmark”
<Bookmark List>
2. Select a bookmark ]C
• Connected to the site.
Using the Submenus of the Bookmark List
Screen
1. From the Bookmark List screen (See above),
M
[Menu] ]Select from the following submenu
items
Connect
You can connect to the selected Bookmark site.
Edit bookmark
You can edit the title and URL of the selected
Bookmark. After editing, press I[Done].
Delete
You can delete the selected Bookmark.
Delete selected
You can select and delete multiple Bookmarks. After
selecting, M[Menu]>Select “Delete”
Delete all
You can delete all the Bookmarks registered. To delete
all, C>Enter terminal security code >C[Done].
URL
You can display the URL of the selected Bookmark.
Copy URL
You can copy the URL of the selected Bookmark. For
the copy, see “Copying/Cutting/Pasting” (P209).
Compose message
You can paste the URL of the selected Bookmark to
the text of i-mode mail and send it. Go to step 2 of
“Composing i-mode mail” (P139).
Ir exchange
You can send the selected Bookmark using infrared
rays. For details, see “Using the Infrared Exchange
Function” (P174).
Menu Select
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg71.png)
112
i-mode
Displaying Screen memo
C]]
3
You can display the web pages saved without connecting
to i-mode.
• For the registration method for the site screen, see
“Using the submenus for the Site screen” (P120).
1. From the i-mode menu (P109), “Screen memo”
<Screen Memo List>
2. Select a screen memo ]C
• The Screen Memo List screen appears.
Using the Submenus of the Screen Memo
Screen
1. From the Screen memo List screen See above
M
[Menu] ]Select from the following submenu
items
View
You can display the selected screen memo.
Edit title
You can edit the title of the selected screen memo.
Delete
You can delete the selected screen memo.
Delete selected
You can select and delete multiple screen memos.
After selecting,
M
[Menu]
>
Select “Delete”.
Delete all
You can delete all the screen memos. To delete all, C
>Enter terminal security code >C[Done].
URL
You can display the URL of the selected screen
memo.
Protect ON/OFF
You can give or cancel protection for the selected
screen memo. You cannot delete protected screen
memos.
Using the Submenus of the Screen Memo
Screen
1. From the Screen memo display See left M[Menu]
]Select from the following submenu items
Save graphics 1
You can select and save an image contained in a
screen memo. You can confirm the saved image by
“My picture” of “Data box”>”i-mode” folder. >P154
Menu Select
Screen memo
i-mode
DescriptionIcon
Protected Screen
memo
Unprotected Screen
memo
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg72.png)
113
i-mode
Show properties
–URL : You can display the URL of the displayed
screen memo.
–Page properties : You can check the title and URL
of the displayed screen memo.
–Certificates 2:You can display the certificate used
by the displayed screen memo.
Retry 3
A GIF animation is played back from the beginning.
Edit title
You can edit the title of the displayed screen memo.
Delete
You can delete the displayed screen memos.
Protect ON/OFF
You can activate or cancel protection for the displayed
the page. You cannot delete protected saved pages.
1: Not selected this menu in case the screen memo does not
include an image.
2: Not selected this menu in case the certificate is not used as a
screen memo.
3: Not selected this menu in case screen memo does not include
of GIF animation.
Displaying Last URL
C]]
4
When you end i-mode, the URL of the page displayed last is
stored as “Last URL”. By using “Last URL”, you can connect
to the site or Internet web page you visited last time.
1. From the i-mode menu (P109), “Last URL” ]I
[Done]
Information
•
If you press Cin screen of URL, you can edit the latest URL
address.
Displaying Internet Web Pages
C]]
5
You can display web pages supporting i-mode and
directly access sites from the history of the sites you
visited by entering their URLs.
1. From the i-mode menu (P109), “Go to location” ]
Select from the following items
Input address
You can display Internet web pages supporting i-mode
by entering URLs. After entering, press I[Done] to
access.
URL history
You can directly access sites by selecting URLs you
visited from the URL history.
Information
• You can enter URL up to 256 characters by half width.
• You can view the list up to 50 address in URL history.
• Depending on the type of the accessed Internet site, the page
might not be displayed correctly.
i-mode
Next Page
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg73.png)
114
i-mode
• Web pages other than Internet web pages supporting i-mode
might not be displayed correctly.
Using the Submenus of the URL Screen
1. From URL history screen, press M]Select
submenus
Connect
You can connect the site in URL history.
Edit URL
You can connect URL in history after editing URL
address.
Delete
You can delete the history of URL.
Delete all
You can delete the history of all URL to register. To
delete all, C>Enter terminal security code >C
[Done].
Compose message
You can compose i-mode mail with attaching URL to
the text. Go to step 2 on page 139 of “Composing i-
mode mail”.
Displaying MessageR/F
C]]
6
You can display received MessagesR/F.
• MessageR:
Your required information is delivered automatically
once you apply for the message service on the site
providing the service.
• MessageF:
Messages are delivered free of charge by performing
the Received settings in the option settings. Refer to
“i-mode User’s Manual” for how to set it up.
: If you register FOMA service since October 1, 2004, the default
setting is Received.
i-mode
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg74.png)
115
i-mode
1. From the i-mode menu (P110), “Message” ]
“MessageR”/“MessageF”
<MessageR/F List>
•J/FE: You can check the previous or next page when
the multiple pages are.
2. Select a MessageR/F to display ]C
<Display MessageR/F>
•J: Displays the history of messageR/F.
•FE: You can scroll the screen.
Information
•You can save MessageR up to 100 and MessageF up to 50.
Depending on the size of message, the number of message
to save can be reduced.
Icons on the MessageR/F List Screen and the
Display MessageR/F Screen
Menu Select
MessageR
Menu Select
i-mode
Next Page
DescriptionIcon
Unread MessageR/F
Read MessageR/F
Protected MessageR/F
Subject
An image is attached.
A file with the UIM operation restriction function
set up is attached.
MessageR/F with a file attached or pasted
Attached melody
A melody is attached or pasted.
Received date and time
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg75.png)
116
i-mode
Using the Submenus of the MessageR/F
List Screen
Setting item/Setting at purchase >P244
1. From the MessageR/F List screen (P115),
M[Menu] ]Select from the following submenu
items
Delete
You can delete the selected MessageR/F.
Delete selected
You can select and delete multiple MessagesR/F. After
selecting, M[Menu] >Select “Delete”.
Delete all
You can delete all the MessagesR/F. To delete all, C
>Enter terminal security code >C[Done].
Protect ON/OFF
You can give or cancel protection for the selected
MessageR/F. You cannot delete protected MessagesR/F.
Sort
You can sort MessagesR/F displayed on the List
screen.
Filter
You can change types of the MessageR/F displayed
on the List screen.
Using the Submenus of the Display
MessageR/F Screen
1. From the Display MessageR/F screen (P115),
M[Menu] ]Select from the following submenu
items
Delete
You can delete the displayed MessageR/F.
Protect ON/OFF
You can give or cancel protection for the displayed
MessageR/F. You cannot delete protected
MessagesR/F.
Add to phonebook 1
You can add phone number or mail address displayed
on the MessageR/F to phonebook. Go to step 2 on page
58 of “Adding to the phonebook”.
Save pasted data 2
You can save the melody ( ) to attach the message
request/ free. You can view the saved melody “Melody”
of “Data box” >“i-mode” folder. >
P1
64
Save attach file 2
You can save the melody ( ) or image ( ) to
attach the MessageR/F. You can view the saved
melody or the image “Melody”/“My picture” of “Data
box”
>
“i-mode” folder.
>
P154, P164
1: You can select this menu after selecting the phone number or
mail address to register. If the item to register does not exist,
you cannot activate this function.
i-mode
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg76.png)
117
i-mode
2: You can activate this function after selecting the file saved in. If
the file to save in you cannot select this menu.
Automatically Receiving MessageR/F
If you receive a MessageR/F, contents of the MessageR/F
are automatically displayed.
1. Receive a MessageR or MessageF
•
(White) or (White) is displayed.
2. The reception results are displayed
• To confirm the received MessageR/F right away,
select “MessageR”/”MessageF” and then press C.
•Q: Returns to previous screen.
Checking Whether Center Holds
MessageR/F
C]]
7
You can check whether the i-mode Center holds any i-
mode mail and/or MessageR/F that arrived when the
phone was out of the service area or turned off.
1. From the Stand-by screen, press M[Mail] at least
for two seconds
• The Check Result screen appears. To read the
received MessageR/F right away, select
“MessageR”/”MessageF” and then press C.
Information
•If the i-mode Center holds i-mode mail and/or a MessageR/F,
an icon (P31) is displayed. Note that the icon may not be
displayed if i-mode mail or a MessageR/F arrives at the i-
mode Center while the FOMA phone is turned off.
Setting Functions of i-mode
You can set functions of i-mode and MessageR/F.
Home
C]]
81
You can set the URL of a web page displayed when “Home”
is selected and whether to enable/disable “Home” (P121).
Setting items/Setting at purchase >P224
1. From the i-mode menu (P109), “i-mode setting” ]
“Home”
2.“Enable” or “Disable”
3. Select the URL field ]C]Enter a URL ]C
• If “ [Done] Disable” is selected, you cannot enter a
URL.
4. I[Done]
i-mode
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg77.png)
118
i-mode
View
C]]
82
You can set functions related to displaying sites and
screen memos.
Setting at purchase >P224, 225
1. From the i-mode menu (P109), “i-mode setting” ]
“View” ]Select from the following setting items ]
After setting, I[Done]
Character size
You can change the character size for text of sites,
screen memos pages and MessagesR/F.
Image display
You can set whether to display images contained in
sites, and screen memos.
Scroll
You can set the number of lines scrolled when
pressing Hon a display displaying text of sites,
screen memos and MessagesR/F.
Message list disp.
You can set whether to display contents of a
MessageR/F in line (1/2 line).
Pasted melody
You can set whether to activate a melody of received
messageR/F. (If you set “Cancel”, the melody is
deleted.)
: MessageR/F is displayed regardless of setting of image display.
Certificates
C]]
83
You can set a certificate used for displaying SSL-enabled
sites.
1. From the i-mode menu (P109), “i-mode setting” ]
“Certificates” ]M[Menu] ]Select from the
following setting items
Certificate info
You can view the selected certificate.
Valid/Invalid
You can set whether to validate or invalidate the
selected certificate.
• You can check the status of a certificate by the
following symbols. : Valid : Invalid
Information
• If “Valid/Invalid” is set to “Invalid”, you cannot display the sites
with that certificate.
i-mode
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg78.png)
119
i-mode
Others
C]]
84
You can set i-mode connection timeout and the type of
message to check. You can also check the i-mode
settings.
Setting items/Setting at purchase >P225
1. From i-mode menu (P109), “i-mode setting” ]
“Others” ]Select from the following setting items
Connection timeout
It may take long to download from some sites. You
can set the time to wait before cancelling
downloading. (60 seconds, 90 seconds, Unlimited)
After setting, press I[Done].
i-motion auto play
You can set whether to play back an i-motion movie
automatically, for when you have downloaded a
standard (normal) type of i-motion movie from a site.
After setting, press I[Done].
Check new message
You can set the type of message to check for when
you “Check new message” from i-mode mail,
MessageR and MessageF. After setting, press
I[Done].
Check settings
You can check the individual “i-mode setting”.
Reset settings
You can reset each of the “i-mode setting” to their
defaults. To reset the settings, C>Enter terminal
security code >C[Done].
Reset data
Deletes all data related to i-mode (Bookmark, Screen
memo, URL history) except for MessageR/F. But, you
cannot delete the message saved in UIM. To reset the
data, C>Enter terminal security code >C[Done].
Information
• Even when you have set “Connection Timeout” to “Unlimited”,
you may be disconnected owing to radio wave conditions.
i-mode
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg79.png)
120
i-mode
Displaying Sites
You can connect to sites by easy key operation, and use
various types of services offered by IPs (Information Service
Providers). (For some sites, you might need to apply to the
IPs separately.)
1. From the i-mode menu (P109), “iMenu”
• blinks during i-mode communication.
2. Select an item (link) ]C
<Site>
•FE: You can scroll the menu.
•P: You can end i-mode.
Information
• If there is a number in front of the item showing the link, you
can connect to that link directly by pressing the same number
on the keypad. Note that some sites cannot be connected.
• Depending on the site, images might not be displayed.
• Depending on the site connected, the confirmation screen
might appear stating that mobile phone information is sent.
Your mobile phone information (the model and the serial
number of your mobile phone) is sent to the IP (Information
Service Provider) over the Internet, so could be deciphered by
third parties. The phone number, address or age are not sent
to IP (Information Service provider).
Using the Submenus of the Site Screen
1. From the Site screen (left), M[Menu] ]Select
from the following submenu items
Add bookmark
You can add the URL of the Site screened to Bookmark.
You can register the site as a Bookmark (Edit mode for
title and URL) by pressing I[Done]. You can access
directly the site from the registered bookmark.
Add screen memo
You can save a displayed web page as a screen
memo. You can display screen memos without
connecting to i-mode. >P112
Save graphics 1
You can select and save an image contained in a web
page.
>
P124
Show properties
–URL : You can check the URL of the displayed site.
–Page properties : You can check information on
the displayed web page.
–Certificates 2:You can check the certificate used
by the displayed site.
Menu list
Menu Select
i-mode
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg7a.png)
121
i-mode
Bookmark list
You can view a list of bookmarks registered by “Add
bookmark”. If you select a bookmark, you can directly
access the site.
Go to location
–Input address : You can access web pages
supporting i-mode by entering URL. After entering it,
and then pressing I[Done], you can connect the
site.
–URL history : You can select the URL history of a
displayed site to directly access the web page.
Screen memo list
You can view a list of pages saved as “Screen Memo”.
You can display the saved page by selecting it.
Menu
You can bring up the iMenu display.
Home
You can display the web page registered as “Home”
(P111).
Reload
You can reload data of a site. The contents of the site
will change to the latest information each time you
reload if the site has been updated.
Compose message
You can send the URL of site being displayed or the
URL for link with them inserted in the message. Go to
step 2 on page 139 of “Composing message”.
Change char. code
When characters are not displayed correctly, you can
convert them to the correct ones.
Add to phonebook 3
You can add the phone number and mail address
displayed on the web page to the phonebook. Go to
step 2 on page 58 of “Adding to phonebook”.
Retry 4
You can play back a GIF animation from the beginning.
1: You cannot activate this menu in case the image to save is not
included in a site or “Image” is set to not display. (P118)
2: If you don't have a certificate to access the site, you cannot
use this menu.
3: After selecting the phone number or mail address to register,
you can activate this menu. Otherwise, you cannot activate it.
4: You cannot activate this menu when GIF animation is not
included on displayed site.
i-mode
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg7b.png)
122
i-mode
Information
• A few sites cannot be allowed to save as a bookmark.
• When characters are not displayed correctly even after
“Change char. code”, repeat the operation. However, even
when you repeat this operation, the correct characters might
not come up. The original characters are displayed if you
repeat the operation four times.
• If you “Change char. code” when the correct characters are
displayed, wrong characters might come up instead.
SSL Pages
SSL pages use data encryption for data transmission to
prevent hacking and source-file overwriting so that you
can more safely exchange personal information.
• If you try to display an SSL-enabled page, the SSL
communication starting message appears. When an
SSL page is displayed, appears.
• When moving from an SSL page to a regular page, the
confirmation display appears. After “Yes” is selected, a
regular page is displayed and disappears.
How to See/Use Sites
Entering/Selecting Information on Sites
When you use a site, you may enter characters (text box) or
select an item from multiple choices (radio button, checkbox,
pull down menu).
i-mode
Used for item selection.
You can select only one
item.
Radio button
Used for item selection.
You can select multiple
items.
Checkbox
Display
Example Description
Name
You can enter characters.Text box
Used for item selection. If
you select a pull down
menu, a list of selectable
items is displayed.
Pull down
menu
ID
Password
Tokyo
Saitama
Kanagawa
:
Unselected
:
Selected
:
Unselected
:
Selected
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg7c.png)
123
i-mode
Returning to Obtained Previous Page/Going
to Obtained Next Page
The FOMA phone stores the last few screens displayed.
1. To display the previous page, L
To display the next page, R
Operations from Highlighted Information
You can easily make a call, send mail, and display Internet
web pages using highlighted information (phone numbers,
mail addresses, URLs, and so on) displayed on sites and in
mail and MessageR/F.
Phone To function/AV Phone To function
You can make a call by selecting displayed information
such as a phone number.
• You may not be able to use the Phone To/AV Phone To
function depending on the site.
1. Select information such as a phone number ]C
2. “Voice call”/“Video-phone call”
• You can send make a call after setting the Caller ID
notification depending on the screen.
Information
• You can add phone number information displayed on a web
page to the phonebook from the submenu of the site screen.
Mail To function
You can send mail by selecting displayed information such
as a mail address.
• You may not be able to use the Mail To function
depending on the site.
1. Select information such as a mail address ]C
• Go to step 2 of “Composing i-mode mail” (P139).
Information
• You can add mail address information displayed on a web
page to the phonebook from the submenu of the site screen.
Web To function
You can display a web page by selecting displayed
information such as URL.
• You may not be able to use the Web To function
depending on the site.
i-mode
Next page
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg7d.png)
124
i-mode
1. Select information such as URL ]Press I[Yes]
• If the confirmation screen to connect appears, press
I[Yes].
i-appli To function
You can start i-appli by selecting the displayed URL (link).
1. Select i-appli information ]C]I[Yes]
• After downloading is done, the screen for
confirmation will be displayed.
Information
• If “i-appli To” (P150) is set to “OFF”, you cannot start i-appli by
this operation.
Downloading Images from Sites
You can set images saved from the displayed web page
or screen memos. You can check the saved images by
“My picture” of “Data box” >“i-mode” folder. >P154
1. Displaying Site/ Saved Page screen ]
M
[Menu] ]
“Save graphics” ]
C
]Select an image ]
C
]
“Yes”
Information
• Some images cannot be saved.
• You cannot select “Save graphics” if the image to save is not
included or “Image” (P118) is set to not to save.
Downloading i-melody from Sites
You can download a melody from a site and set it.
1. Display a site that supports downloading of
melodies ]Select a melody ]C
• After the download is completed, the confirmation
screen appears.
2. Video content menu
• Save: You can save the downloaded melody.
• Play: You can play the downloaded melody.
• File property: This menu allows to view the
information of i-motion downloaded from network.
• Back: The menu is returned back to the site not
saving the melody.
Information
• Depending on the site, you might not be able to download
melodies.
• Some downloaded melodies might not be played back
successfully.
i-mode
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg7e.png)
125
i-mode
Obtaining i-motion Movies from Sites
The i-motion movie is a moving image file containing
images and sound. You can obtain i-motion movies from
sites supporting i-motion movies. >Check the “i-mode”
folder (P161).
• See “i-mode User’s Manual” for details.
1. Select an i-motion movie on a site that supports
downloading of i-motion movies ]C
• After downloading is done, the screen for
confirmation will be displayed.
2. Video content menu
• Save: You can save the i-motion downloaded from
network.
• Play : This menu allows to play i-motion downloaded
from network.
• File property : This menu allows to view the
information of i-motion downloaded from network.
• Back : This menu allows to return the site not saving
i-motion.
Information
• You can change the playback methods for while downloading
i-motion movies. >P119
• Some downloaded i-motion movies might not be played back
correctly.
• You cannot download i-motion movies in the streaming type
and the ASF format.
Using My Menu
If you register frequently used sites in My Menu, you will
be able to access them easily.
Registering Sites in My Menu
1.
Bring up the page of the site to be registered
]
Select
“Register My Menu”
]C
2. Select the i-mode password text box ]C]Enter
the i-mode password ]C]”Select”
• See “Changing i-mode Password” (right) for i-mode
password.
Information
• Some sites cannot be registered in My Menu.
• When you subscribe to a pay site in Menu List, it will be
registered in My Menu automatically.
Displaying Sites from My Menu
1. From the Stand-by display, I]”iMenu” ]
”My Menu” ]Select a site to access ]C
i-mode
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg7f.png)
126
i-mode
i-mode
Changing i-mode Password
The “i-mode password” (four digits) is required to
subscribe to and unsubscribe from message services and
i-mode pay sites, and to do i-mode mail settings. At
purchase, this password is set to “0000” (four zeros), so
you need to change it to your own i-mode password. Be
sure not to let others know your i-mode password.
1.On the Stand-by display, I]“iMenu” ]
“Options” ]“Change i-mode Password”
2. Select the “Current Password” text box ]C]
Enter your i-mode password (four digits) ]C
• At purchase, the setting is “0000”, so enter “0000”
for the first time.
3. Select the “New Password” text box ]C]Enter
a new i-mode password (four digits) ]C
4. Select the “New Password (Confirmation)” text box
]C]Enter a new i-mode password (four digits)
] C]“Select”
• Enter the same number that you did in step 3.
Information
• If you forget your i-mode password, you can have it reset to
“0000” at a handling counter such as a DoCoMo shop. You
will be required to show your official identification (driver’s
license, etc.).
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg80.png)
127
Mail Menu .............................................128
i-mode Mail...........................................128
Displaying Mail in Inbox.......................129
Displaying Mail in Outbox....................134
Displaying Mail in Unsent message ....137
Composing Mail ...................................139
Checking New i-mode mail and
Message ...............................................143
Receiving Selected Mail ......................143
Checking whether Center Holds SMS....144
Changing Mail Settings........................144
Mail
Select
Inbox
On the Stand-by display,
C[Menu] ]or “Mail”
To display the Mail menu
Select
Mail
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg81.png)
Mail Menu
On the mail menu, the mail functions offered by the FOMA
phone are displayed.
i-mode Mail
The i-mode phone has the mail functions for exchanging e-
mail (electronic mail) via the Internet. You need to subscribe
to “i-mode” to use i-mode mail.
• See “i-mode User’s Manual” for more details.
• This model does not support all the services described
in “i-mode User’s Manual.”
Check which models support which services in “i-mode
User’s Manual.”
SMS messages (short messages)
You can send and receive SMS messages between
FOMA phones without subscribing to i-mode.
Sending and receiving SMS messages with subscribers to
overseas carriers in addition
to DoCoMo are also available. For information on the
countries and overseas carriers with which SMS
messages can be exchanged, see DoCoMo’s web site.
• Refer to “Network Services User’s Guide” for more
details.
Displaying Mail in Inbox
C]]
1
The inbox folder list is displayed. You can sort mail by
folder. When you open a folder, you can check the
records and contents of received i-mode mail and SMS
messages.
128
Mail
Mail
DescriptionMenu item
Inbox You can check the records and contents of
received i-mode mail and SMS messages.
You can check the records and contents of
sent i-mode mail and SMS messages.
You can check the contents of temporarily
saved i-mode mail and SMS messages.
You can bring up the display to compose
i-mode mail/SMS.
You can receive i-mode mail held at the i-mode
Center by checking the SMS Center.
You can receive SMS messages by checking the
SMS Center.
Outbox
Unsent
message
Compose mail
Check new
message
Receive option You can check the subjects of i-mode mail
held at the i-mode Center and select mail to
receive, or delete mail at the Center before
receiving it.
Check new
SMS
Mail setting You can change the settings of each mail
function of the FOMA phone.
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg82.png)
1. From the Mail menu, “Inbox”
<Received Mail Folder List>
2. Select a folder ]C
•J/FE: You can view previous or after pages.
3. Select mail ]C
<Received Mail Display>
•I
[Reply]: You can reply the receiver. Go to step 3 on
page 139 of “Composing i-mode mail” / step 3 of page
141 “Composing SMS”.
•J: You can view previous or next mail.
•FE: You can scroll the screen.
Information
• To delete all displayed the contents in box setting “Security”
(P145) C>Enter terminal security code >C[Done].
• The deco mail via FOMA phone includes of text and URL.
If you select the URL, you can read deco mail. >P134
• You can save mail/SMS the maximum up to 400. Depending
on the size of mail/SMS, the number of mail/SMS to save can
be reduced.
Icons on the Received Mail Folder List Screen
Menu Reply
Ŧ: The menus are displayed same as
Ŧ2 ~ Ŧ3 of screen in the list of
received mail.
SubjectŦ
SenderŦ
The date to receive the mailŦ
Inbox
Menu Select
DoCoMo Taro
Hanako
DoCoMo Ichiro
SubjectŦ3
The time to receive the mailŦ1 SenderŦ2
Ŧ1: The mail you receive is displayed
on a time basis that day. From
the next day on, each message is
displayed by the date when you
received it.
Ŧ2: The name is displayed when the
entry is saved in phonebook.
Ŧ3: SMS is displayed as “SMS”
The number of not read mail
Folder
Inbox (1)
Menu Select
129
Mail
Mail
Next Page
DescriptionIcon
(gray) Folder without unread mail/ SMS messages
<Received Mail List>
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg83.png)
Received Mail List and Marks on Display Screen
Using the Submenu of the Received Mail Folder
List Display
1. On the Received Mail Folder List screen (P129),
M[Menu] ]Select from the following submenu
items
Create folder
You can add a folder.
Rename folder
You can edit the name of the selected folder.
Mail received as To-type or sender
Mail received as Cc-type
Mail received as Bcc-type
A melody is pasted.
130
Mail
Mail
DescriptionIcon
A melody is attached.
i-appli launch information is pasted.
i-appli launch information is damaged.
An pasted melody is damaged.
DescriptionIcon
Unread mail
Read mail
Unread SMS messages
Read SMS messages
Unread SMS reports
Read SMS reports
Unread SMS messages in the UIM
Read SMS messages in the UIM
Protected mail/ SMS messages
Forwarded mail/ SMS messages
Replied mail/ SMS messages
Subject
Mail with a file to which the UIM
restrictions are set attached
Mail with a file attached or pasted
DescriptionIcon
Folder with unread mail/ SMS messages
Created folder without unread mail/ SMS
messages
Created folder with unread mail/ SMS
messages
(gray)
(blue)
(blue)
Received date and time
An image is attached.
An image of 10000 byte over is attached.
An i-motion file is attached.
An pasted data is damaged.
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg84.png)
131
Mail
Delete folder
You can delete the selected folder. You cannot delete
a folder in which mail is saved.
Auto-sort
You can set sort conditions to the selected folder. Go
to step 2 of “Distributing the received mail to the
folder automatically” (P133).
: These operations are not available when you select Inbox.
Using the Submenu of the Received Mail
List Screen
Setting item/Setting at purchase >P244
1.
On the Received Mail Folder List screen (P129),
M[Menu] ]Select from the following submenu items
Move to folder 1
You can move the selected mail to other added folders.
Delete
You can delete the selected mail.
Delete selected
You can select and delete multiple mail messages. After
selecting mail messages, M[Menu]. >Select “Delete”.
Delete all
You can delete all mail messages in the folder. To
delete all, C>Enter terminal security code >C
[Done].
Protect ON/OFF 1
You can set or cancel the protection to the selected
mail. Protected mail cannot be moved/deleted.
Sort
You can sort the mail messages displayed on the List
display.
Filter
You can change the type of the mail messages displayed
on the List display.
UIM 2
You can move and copy the selected SMS message
to the UIM, and move and copy the SMS messages in
the UIM to the FOMA phone.
1: You cannot use this menu of SMS in the UIM.
2: You cannot use this menu in protected SMS or SMS delivery
report.
Information
• You can move mail messages from the created folder by user
to the pre-installed folders.
• If the inbox is full, the read mail will not be deleted until the
space is available to receive new mail.
Using the Submenu of the Received Mail
Display Screen
1. On the Received Mail Folder List screen (P129), M
[Menu] ]Select from the following submenu items
Reply
You can reply after selecting the method to reply. Go to
step 3 on page 139 of “Composing i-mode mail”/ step 3
on page 141 “Composing SMS”.
Mail
Next Page
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg85.png)
132
Mail
– Reply 1:You can reply to the sender of i-mode mail
from the detailed received mail list.
– Reply quoted 1:You can send the reply with
quoting the original text in your received i-mode mail.
– Reply all 1:You can reply all receivers and senders
at the same time.
– Reply quoted all 1:You can reply all receivers and
senders with quoting the original text in your
received i-mode mail.
Forward
You can forward the displayed mail to other party. Go to
step 2 (P139) of “Composing i-mode mail” or step 2 (P141)
of “Composing SMS messages.
Move to folder 2
You can move the displayed mail to other added
folders.
Delete
You can delete the displayed mail.
Protect ON/OFF 2
You can set or cancel the protection to the displayed
mail. The protected mail messages cannot be
moved/deleted.
Store address
You can register mail address/ phone number of
receiver on displaying the mail. Go to step 2 on page
58 of “Adding to Phonebook”
Add to phonebook 3
You can add the mail address included with other
address and phone number of the sender of the
displayed mail to the phonebook. Go to step 2 of
“Adding to Phonebook” (P58).
Save pasted data 1 4
You can save the melody ( ) pasted to the displayed
mail. You can check the saved melodies by selecting
“Data box”. >“Melody”. >“i-mode” folder. >P164
Save attach file 4
You can save an image ( ) and a melody ( ) of up
to 10000 bytes attached to the displayed mail. You can
check the saved images by selecting “Data box”. >
“My picture”. >“i-mode” folder. >P154, P164
Copy
• After selecting the item, see “Copying/Cutting/Pasting”
(P209).
– Body: You can copy the text.
– Subject 1:You can copy the title.
–
Sender: You can copy e-mail address or phone number
to sender.
UIM 5
You can move and copy the displayed SMS message
to the UIM, and move and copy the SMS messages in
the UIM to the FOMA phone.
1: This menu is not displayed in SMS.
2: You cannot use this menu in SMS of UIM.
Mail
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg86.png)
133
Mail
3: You can activate this menu after selecting mail address and
phone number to register. Otherwise, you cannot activate this
function.
4: You can activate this menu after selecting the file to save. If the
file does not exist, you cannot activate this function.
5: You cannot activate this menu in i-mode mail, protected SMS.
Information
• The Submenu items for the SMS report / voice mail incoming
notification display screen are “Move to folder”, “Delete,” and
“Protect ON/OFF” only.
Distributing the received mail to the folder
automatically
The mail or SMS is applicable for the condition can be
saved the folder automatically. You can set this only to
additional folder.
1. On the Received Mail Folder List screen (P129),
select a folder to specify conditions ]M[Menu]
]Auto Sort
• The screen for automatic sort is displayed.
2. M[Menu] ]Select sub-menu.
Address 1 2
You can enter e-mail address or phone number to
distribute each folder.
– Open phonebook: You can input the phone
number in phonebook.
– Input address: You can input the address. When
you enter e-mail address, you input correctly to a
domain (the part of after @ mark).
Subject 1 2
You can input the subject of mail to distribute a folder.
Release
You can cancel one of conditions of distribution of folder.
Release all
You can cancel all conditions.
1 : You cannot set the multiple conditions in same folder.
2 : If the received mail is under multiple conditions, the setting of
“Address” is preferred.
Receiving i-mode Mail/SMS Messages
Automatically
When the FOMA phone is in the service area, it
automatically receives i-mode mail/ SMS messages.
1. Mail or an SMS message is received
• (White) or (White) is displayed.
2. The result of the reception is displayed
• If you want to check the received i-mode mail
message immediately, select “i-mode mail”, and then
press C.
•If you want to check the received SMS message
immediately, press C
•Q: Go to previous screen.
Mail
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg87.png)
134
Mail
Saving Images over 10000 bytes
A JPEG image over 10000 bytes is not downloaded
properly to the FOMA handset. Therefore, you can save it
after extracting the data from URL for image view in mail
text, and connecting i-shot center.
1. On the Received Mail Folder List screen (P129),
select “URL” ]C]“Yes”
• For the method saving images, see “Obtaining
Images from Sites” (P124).
Information
• You can view the contents of received Deco-mail by this way.
Downloading i-motion Movies from i-motion Mail
Data of i-motion mail is not downloaded to the FOMA phone
even when it is received. You need to access the i-motion
mail Center from its URL given to the mail text to see an i-
motion movie to download and save the data. The saved i-
motion can be checked in “i-motion” of “Data box” >
“i-mode” folder (P161).
1. From the Received Mail Folder List screen (P129),
select the URL ]C]I“Yes”
• You can start to download i-motion.
• When downloading, you can play a few i-motions at the
same time.
2. After downloading, press Q
• Save: You can save the downloaded i-motion.
• Play: You can play downloaded i-motion.
• File property: You can view information of downloaded i-
motion from a site.
• Back: The site will be returned, not saving i-motion.
Displaying Mail in Outbox
C]]
2
The Sent Mail List is displayed. You can check the records
and contents of sent i-mode mail and SMS messages.
1. From the Mail menu (P127), select “Outbox”.
•J/F,E: If there are multiple pages, the previous or next
page is displayed.
Outbox
Menu Select
SubjectŦ3
The time to send the mailŦ1 ReceiverŦ2
Ŧ1: The mail you receive is displayed
on a time basis that day. From
the next day on, each message is
displayed by the date when you
received it.
Ŧ2: The name is displayed when the
entry is saved in phonebook.
Ŧ3: SMS is displayed as SMS
docomo. taro
docomo. jiro
docomo. saburo
Mail
<Outbox>
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg88.png)
2. Select a mail ]C
<Sent Mail Display>
•J: Display the previous or next page.
•FE: Scroll by screen.
Information
• To display the box which is set “Security” (P145), press C>
Enter terminal security code >C[Done].
• You can save mail/SMS the maximum up to 400. Depending
on the size of mail/SMS, the number of mail/SMS to save can
be reduced.
Icons on the Sent Mail List display and the Sent Mail
display screen
Menu Select
Ŧ: The menus are displayed same as
Ŧ2 ~ Ŧ3 of screen in the list of
received mail.
SubjectŦ
The time to send the mailŦ
ReceiverŦ
135
Mail
Mail
Description
Icon
Mail successfully sent
Mail failed to be sent
SMS message successfully sent
Sent SMS messages in the UIM
SMS message failed to be sent
Protected mail/ SMS messages
Mail with a file attached
Mail with an attached file to which UIM
restrictions are set
Description
Icon
Mail address failed to be sent as
To-type mail
Mail address successfully sent as
Cc-type mail
Mail address failed to be sent as
Cc-type mail
Mail address successfully sent as
Bcc-type mail
Mail address failed to be sent as Bcc-
type mail
An image is attached.
A melody is attached.
Moving images are attached.
Subject
Mail address successfully sent as
To-type mail
Sent date and time
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg89.png)
136
Mail
Information
• When sending an SMS message, the first part of the text is
displayed in the subject field of the list screen.
Using the Submenu of the Sent Mail List
Screen
Setting item/Setting at purchase >P244
1. From the Sent Mail Folder List screen (P135), M
[Menu] ]Select from the following Submenu items
Edit
You can edit the selected mail again. See
“Composing i-mode mail” (P139) / “Composing SMS
messages” (P141).
Delete
You can delete the selected mail.
Delete selected
You can select and delete multiple mail messages. After
selecting mail messages, M[Menu] >Select “Delete”.
Delete all
You can delete all mail messages in the folder. To delete
all, C>Enter terminal security code >C[Done].
Protect ON/OFF 1
You can set or cancel the protection to the selected
mail. Protected mail cannot be deleted.
Sort
You can sort the mail messages displayed in the list
screen.
Filter
You can change the type of the mail messages
displayed in the list display.
UIM 2
You can move and copy the selected SMS message
to the UIM, and move and copy the SMS messages in
the UIM to the FOMA phone.
1 : You cannot use this menu of SMS in the UIM.
2 : You cannot use this menu in i-mode mail or SMS delivery report.
Using the Submenu of the Sent Mail Display
Screen
1. From the Sent Mail Display screen (P134), M
[Menu] ]Select from the following Submenu items
Edit
You can edit the displayed mail again. Go to step 2 in
“Composing i-mode mail” (P139) /“Composing SMS
messages” (P141).
Delete
You can delete the displayed mail.
Protect ON/OFF 1
You can set or cancel the protection to the displayed
mail. The protected mail messages cannot be deleted.
Store address
You can register mail address/phone number of
receiver on displaying the mail. Go to step 2 on page
58 of “Adding to Phonebook”.
Mail
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg8a.png)
137
Mail
Add to phonebook 2
You can add the mail address and phone number of
the sender of the displayed mail to the phonebook.
Go to step 2 (P58) of “Adding to Phone Book”.
Copy 3
• After selecting the item, see “Copying/Cutting/
Pasting” (P209).
– Body: You can copy the text.
– Subject: You can copy the subject.
UIM 4
You can move and copy the displayed SMS message
to the UIM, and move and copy the SMS messages in
the UIM to the FOMA phone.
1: This function is not available in SMS of FOMA card.
2: After select the mail address/ phone number, you can activate
the function. Otherwise, you cannot activate the menu properly.
3: This function is not available for of the SMS.
4:
This function is not available for the protected SMS.
Displaying Mail in Unsent message
C]]
3
The Unsent message List is displayed. You can check the
contents of saved i-mode mail and SMS messages which
have not been yet sent.
1. From the Mail menu (P127), “Unsent message”
•J/FE
: Displays the previous and next page in case
of being many pages.
2. Select a mail ]C
<Unsent message Display>
Information
• To display the box which is set “Security” (P145), press C>
Enter terminal security code >C[Done].
• You can save mail/ SMS the maximum up to 400. Depending
on the size of mail/ SMS, the number of mail/SMS to save can
be reduced.
Menu Select Send
Compose message
1Kbyte
0Kbyte
Unsent message
Menu Select
DoCoMo Ichiro
SubjectŦ3
The time to saveŦ1 ReceiverŦ2
Ŧ1: The mail you save is displayed on
a time basis that day. From the
next day on, each message is
displayed by the date when you
saved it.
Ŧ2: The name is displayed when the
entry is saved in phonebook.
Ŧ3: SMS is displayed as “SMS”
Mail
<Unsent message List>
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg8b.png)
138
Mail
Icons on the Unsent Mail List display and the Unsent
Mail display screen Using the Submenu of the Unsent Message
List Screen
Setting item/Setting at purchase >P245
1. From the Unsent Message List screen (P137),
M
[Menu] ]Select from the following submenu
items
Send
You can send the selected mail.
Delete
You can delete the selected mail.
Delete selected
You can select and delete multiple mail messages.
After selecting mail messages, M[Menu]. >Select
“Delete”.
Delete all
You can delete all mail messages in the folder. To
delete all, C>Enter terminal security code >C
[Done].
Sort
You can sort the mail messages displayed in the list
display.
Filter
You can change the type of the mail messages
displayed on the list display.
Mail
*You need to obtain a miniSD memory card separately to use the functions related to the miniSD memory card. >P166
DescriptionIcon
Unsent mail
Unsent SMS message
Mail with a file attached
A damaged file is pasted.
Subject
Address of To-type
Address of Cc-type
Mail with an attached file to which UIM
restrictions are set
Attached file
A pasted melody file is attached.
i-appli launch information is pasted.
A melody file is pasted.
An image file is attached.
A moving image file is attached.
A damaged melody file is attached.
Text
Address of Bcc-type
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg8c.png)
139
Mail
Using the Submenu of the Unsent Mail
Display Screen
From the Unsent Message List screen (P137), press
M
[Menu] and select a submenu item. See “Using the
Submenu of the Compose Mail display” (P142)/“Using the
Submenu of the Compose SMS Screen” (P142) for the
available submenu items.
Composing Mail
Composing i-mode Mail
C]]
41
You can create and send new i-mode mail.
1. From the Mail menu (P127), select “Compose Mail”
]“Compose message”
<Compose message Display>
2. Select the Address field ]
C
]Enter the
address ]
C
3. Select the Subject field ]
C
]Enter the
subject ]
C
• In case of not attaching the file, Go to step 5.
4. Select (Attach file) item ]
C
]Add attached
file
• Select the file saved “My picture” of Data box” (P154)
/ “Melody”(P164) .
5. Select the Message field ]
C
]Enter
message ]
C
6.
I
[Send]
Information
• Depending on the radio wave conditions, the characters might
not be sent successfully to the destination.
• You register “Phone number XXXX” or “Phone number
XXXX@docomo.ne.jp” (XXXX: Security code) when you add
the mail address including of security code of four digits. For
details, refer to “i-mode User's manual”.
• When half-pitch katakana and pictographs are used for mail
except for when exchanging mail between i-mode phones.
They might not be displayed correctly.
Using the Submenu of the Compose Mail
Display
1. From the Compose Mail display (See left)
M
[Menu]
]Select from the following Submenu items
Compose message
0Kbyte
0Kbyte
Menu Select Send
Mail
Next Page
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg8d.png)
140
Mail
Send
You can send the i-mode mail that you are
composing or editing.
Save
You can save the i-mode mail that you are composing
or editing in unsent message.
Add address
You can add addresses. You can specify multiple
addresses to send same i-mode mail to multiple
recipients at the same time. You can send same mail
to up to five addresses at a time.
– Open phonebook: You can add the address by
searching the phonebook.
– Input address: You can input the address directly.
Address menu 1
– Open phonebook: You can add the address by
searching the phonebook.
– Input address: You can input the address directly.
– Change to To: You can change the setting of
receiver to "To".
– Change to Cc: You can change the setting of
receiver to "Cc".
– Change to Bcc: You can change the setting of
receiver to "Bcc".
– Delete address: You can delete the address.
Attach file menu
– Attach file: You can select the file in “My picture”
(P154) / “i-motion” (P161) / “Melody” (P164) of “Data
box”.
– Delete att. file 2:You can delete the attachment file.
– Play/ Display file 2:You can play or view the file.
Add signature
You can insert a signature at the end of the text of mail.
• You need to register the signature beforehand.
>p145
Delete body
You can delete the i-mode mail that you are
composing or editing.
Delete mail
You can delete the mail on composing or editing.
1 : After selecting / / , you can operate the menu.
2 : After selecting , you can operate the menu.
Information
• The type or receiver
– To: Stands for the usual receiver
– Cc: You select Cc to inform the contents except for direct
receiver.
– Bcc: You select Bcc to inform the contents if you don't want
to be known to other receivers except for direct receiver.
• About attachable files
Mail
Maximum number of filesType of file
Melody
Up to 10 files 1
1 file 2
Image of 10,000 bytes
or less (JPEG, GIF)
Moving image/ i-motion movie
Image over 10,000
bytes (JPEG)
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg8e.png)
141
Mail
1 : Up to 10 files when the total size of a data file including
melodies and images is equivalent of 5,000 full-pitch
characters (i.e., 10,000 bytes).
2 : You can attach either an image or moving image/
i-motion movie of up to 10 Kbytes. You can attach the
file separately from melody files and images of 10,000
bytes or less.
• You cannot attach files that are prohibited from being
attached to mail or output from the FOMA phone to other
devices.
• When a JPEG image or an i-motion movie in excess of 10,000
bytes is attached, the number of characters you can enter in
the text field decreases by the equivalent of 100 full-pitch
characters (200 half-pitch characters).
• The i-mode phone of the mova service cannot receive GIF
images and melodies.
• Some attached files might be deleted at the i-mode Center or
not be received, displayed, or played properly by the
recipients.
Using the Submenu of the Creating next
Entry Screen
From creating next Entry screen press
M
[Menu] and select a
Submenu item. See “Using the Submenu of Character Entry
display” (P208) for the available Submenu items.
Composing SMS messages
C]]
42
You can create and send SMS messages. You can send
and receive SMS messages to and from the subscribers
to overseas carriers in addition to DoCoMo. For
information on the countries and overseas carriers with
which SMS messages can be exchanged, see DoCoMo’s
web site.
1. From the Mail menu (P127), select “Compose Mail”
]“Compose SMS”
<Compose SMS Display>
2. Select the Address field ]
C
]Enter the
recipient’s phone number ]
C
3. Select the Message field ]
C
]Enter the
message ]
C
4. I[Send]
Menu Select Send
Compose SMS
Mail
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg8f.png)
142
Mail
If the recipient is a subscriber to an overseas carrier
other than DoCoMo:
“+” (Press key two times) ]“Country code” ]
“Mobile phone number of the recipient”
• If the mobile phone number starts with 0, enter the
number by omitting “0”.
Information
• Depending on the radio wave conditions, the characters might
not be sent successfully to the destination.
• When you send an SMS message to a subscriber to an
overseas carrier, if characters that the other party does not
support are included in its text, they might not be displayed
correctly.
• If the receiver has i-mode phone of mova service, it may be
received SMS from FOMA phone as i-mode mail.
• You cannot replay to an SMS message from a concealed
number / payphone/number with notification not supported.
• If the full-pitch characters are entered over 70 digits, some of
then can be deleted.
Using the Submenu of the Compose SMS
Display
1. From the Compose SMS display (P141),
M
[Menu]
]Select from the following Submenu items
Send
You can send an SMS message that you are
composing or editing.
Save
You can save an SMS message that you are
composing or editing in Draft box.
Address menu
– Open phonebook: You can add the address by
searching the phonebook.
– Input address: You can input the address directly.
SMS report request
You can set whether to request a report for the SMS
message that you are composing. An SMS report is
an SMS message to notify you when your SMS
message reaches the recipient.
SMS validity term
You can set the period during which the SMS Center
keeps the SMS message that you are composing or
editing when the recipient cannot receive it
immediately.
Delete body
You can delete a sentence inputting in text. The
phone number of receiver will not be deleted.
Delete SMS
You can delete the SMS message that you are
composing or editing.
Mail
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg90.png)
143
Mail
Using the Submenu of the Compose SMS
Display
From the Compose SMS display, press M[Menu] and
select a submenu item. See “Using the Submenu of the
Character Entry display” (P208) for the available
Submenu items.
Checking New i-mode mail and Message
C]]
5
When your FOMA phone has been off or out of the service
area, you can check whether or not the i-mode Center
holds i-mode mail and messageR/F.
1. From the Stand-by screen, press Mfor at least
two seconds
• The Check results display appears. To read the
received i-mode mail immediately, select “Mail” and
press C.
Information
• When the i-mode Center holds i-mode mail and messageR/F,
the relevant icon (P31) is displayed. When mail or messages
arrive at the Center when, for instance, your FOMA phone is
off, the icon might not be displayed.
• Even when “Receive option” is set to “ON,” you will still receive
all mail messages held at the Center if you use “Check new
message.” If you do not want to receive all mail messages,
unmark “Mail” from the “Check new message” (P144).
Receiving Selected Mail
C]]
6
You can check the subject of i-mode mail held at the i-
mode Center and select mail to receive, or delete mail at
the Center before receiving it.
To use this function, you need to set “Receive option”
(P144) to “ON” beforehand.
1. From the Mail menu (P127), “Receive option”
• The phone is connected to the Center, and the
display for selecting mail to receive is displayed.
2. Select the pull-down menu for each mail ]C]
Select “Receive”, “Delete” or “Hold” ]C
3. Select “Receive/Delete” ]C
• The confirmation window is displayed.
4. Select “OK” ]C
• In step 2, the mail messages for which “Receive”
was selected are received immediately.
Information
• See “i-mode User’s Manual” for other operating methods in
addition to the aforementioned one and the icons in the
display
Mail
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg91.png)
144
Mail
Checking whether Center Holds SMS
C]]
7
When your FOMA phone has been off or out of the service
area, you can check whether or not the SMS Center holds
SMS messages.
1. From the Mail menu (P127), “Check new SMS”
• The Check results display appears. To read the
received SMS messages immediately, select SMS
and press C.
Changing Mail Setting
Communication
C]]
81
You can change the settings related to communication of
mail and SMS messages.
Setting items/Setting at purchase >P228
1. From the Mail menu (P127), “Mail setting” ]
“Communication” ]Select from the following
setting items ]After setting,
I
[Done]
Receive opt. setting
You can set whether to select i-mode mail to receive.
If this function is set to “ON,” you cannot receive i-
mode mail automatically.
Receive attach file
You can set whether to receive images or melodies
attached to i-mode mail.
Check new message
When you receive messages by conducting “Check
New Message,” you can select an item to check from
i-mode mail, messageR, and messageF.
SMS report request
You can set whether to request an SMS report when
sending an SMS message. The SMS report notifies
you when your SMS message is delivered to the
destination.
SMS validity term
You can set the period of time that SMS messages
are held at the SMS Center when the recipient cannot
receive the messages.
Information
• The attachment file is set cannot be received because the
file is deleted from i-mode center.
• You can receive the melody of MFi format to attach to the
body of mail when you set the attachment .
Mail
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg92.png)
145
Mail
Edit
C]]
82
You can make the settings related to a signature to be
attached to the mail text and quotation mark for when
replying to mail.
Setting items/Setting at purchase >P228, P229
1. From the Mail menu (P127), “Mail setting” ]“Edit”
]Select from the following setting items ]After
setting, I[Done]
Edit signature
You can set whether to automatically attach your
name and address (signature) at the end of the text
and can set the text of a signature.
Edit quotation
You can set symbols or sentences to be attached to
the head of the original text (quotation mark) for
“Reply quoted”.
View
C]]
83
You can make the settings related to the display of mail
and SMS messages.
Setting items/Setting at purchase >P229
1. From the Mail menu (P127), “Mail setting” ]
“View” ]Select from the following setting items ]
After setting, I[Done]
Character size
You can set the character size of the text on the Mail
display screen.
Scroll
You can set the number of lines to scroll when
pressing
H
on the Mail display screen. (1 line/ 3
lines/ 5 lines)
Mail list display
You can set the display method (the number of
lines/the contents displayed) on the mail list display.
Folder security
You can set security to Inbox, Sent box, and Draft box
in the Mail menu. To display the messages in the box
with security set, C>Enter terminal security code >
C[Done].
Melody auto play
You can set whether to automatically play a melody
attached or pasted on the mail display screen.
Pasted data
You can set whether to activate a melody or an i-appli
to data pasted to the received mail text.
Mail
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg93.png)
146
Mail
Mail
Others
C]]
84
You can check the settings made in “Mail setting” and
reset the settings to the default.
1. From the Mail menu (P127), “Mail setting” ]
“Others” ]Select from the following setting items.
Check settings
You can check the settings made in the “Mail
settings”.
Reset settings
You can reset the settings made in the “Mail settings”
to the default. To reset settings, C>Enter terminal
security code >C[Done].
Reset data
You can delete all mail messages and MessageR/F
stored in the FOMA phone. To reset the datal, C>
Enter terminal security code >C[Done].
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg94.png)
147
What is i-appli.......................................148
Downloading i-appli from Sites ...........148
Starting i-appli......................................149
i-appli
On the Stand-by display,
C[Menu] ]or “i-appli”
To display the Software List
Menu Select
Software list
āāࣻࣻɁຢɈൌഀ
Select
i-appli
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg95.png)
148
i-appli
i-appli
What is i-appli
By downloading various software programs on sites and
saving them into the FOMA phone, you can automatically
update the stock prices, weather information, etc. and
enjoy games even without connecting to the network.
• Refer to “i-mode User’s Manual” for details.
• This model does not support all the services described
in “i-mode User’s Manual”. Check which models
support which services in “i-mode User’s Manual”.
Downloading i-appli from Sites
Download the software from Sites and start the FOMA
phone.
1. Display a site that supports downloading of i-appli
]Select an item that enables you to download the
software ]C
2. After the download is finished, C
• After the download is finished, the communication
setup display may appear. After setting, press I
[Done].
• Some software may start right after it is downloaded.
In that case, the software may not have been saved.
When ending the software, the confirmation display
may appear asking whether to save it. Select “Yes”
to save it.
3. “Yes”/“No”
• Yes: Activates i-appli.
• No: the Site display returns.
Information
• Downloading is not available at some accessed sites.
• At downloading software, the confirmation display might
appear asking whether to use the “serial number of your
mobile phone/UIM”. Select “Yes” to start downloading. In this
case, the “serial number of your mobile phone/UIM” is sent to
the IP (Information Service Provider) over the Internet, so could
be deciphered by third parties. However, your phone number,
address, age and gender are not notified to the IP (Information
Service Provider) or others by this operation.
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg96.png)
149
i-appli
i-appli
Next Page
Starting i-appli
C]
1. Press and hold Ifor at least one second from the
Stand-by display.
<Software List>
2. Select the software to be launched ]C
•P: End the activation of i-appli.
Icons on the Software List
• Each mark will be displayed thinly when downloading by other
FOMA card or version- up of i-appli (Restriction on FOMA card).
Information
• Some software communicates after downloaded. You can let
it not communicate by the i-appli setting.
Using the Submenu of the Software List
Setting item/Setting at purchase >P245
• Some submenus may not be able to be set up
depending on the software.
1. From the Software List (See left), M[Menu] ]
Select from the following Submenu items
Create folder
You can create a folder.
Delete folder
You can delete the folder selected. You cannot delete
a folder in which software is saved.
Rename folder
You can edit the name of the folder selected.
Move to folder
You can move the folder selected to another folder
you composed.
Upgrade
You can upgrade the version of the software selected.
Delete
You can delete the software selected.
Software list
Menu Select
āāࣻࣻɁຢɈൌഀ
DescriptionIcons
i-appli that Auto start is set to
i-appli downloaded from SSL site
Normal i-appli
The folder you composed
(Blue)
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg97.png)
150
i-appli
i-appli
Delete selected
You can select and delete multiple pieces of software.
After selecting, M[Menu]. >Select “Delete”.
Delete all
You can delete all softwares in i-appli. To delete all,
C>Enter terminal security code >C[Done].
Sort
You can sort software.
Properties
You can check the name, size, etc. of the software
selected.
Certificate
You can check the owner, issuer, expiration date, etc.
of the certificate used for the software selected.
Network setting
You can set whether to communicate while the
software selected is being started.
I[Done].
i-appli To
You can set whether to start the software selected
from a site or mail. After setting, press I[Done].
Icon info setting
You can set whether icon information for i-mode mail,
SMS, messageR/F, battery level, Manner Mode, radio
wave strength and being out of area is to be used by
the software selected. After setting, press I[Done].
Autostart setting
You can set to activate the selected software
automatically. If you set “Yes” after selecting “Edit”,
you enter the method for activation and the time. After
setting, press I[Done].
Show desc setting
You can set whether to display software information
at i-appli downloading. After setting, press I[Done].
Autostart failure
You can check information when i-appli fails to start
automatically.
Trace info
You can check information when i-appli supporting the
trace function has been terminated due to an error.
System info
You can check system information such as memory
usage status of i-appli.
: You cannot use the folder you composed.
Information
• In “Show desc setting”, the setting value of this menu is not
reset by “Settings” >“Others” >“Reset settings” >“Default
settings”.
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg98.png)
151
i-appli
i-appli
Next page
Information
• Note that you might not be able to receive timely information if
you have set “Network Setting” to “OFF”.
• When “Upgrade” of the software, the confirmation display may
appear asking whether to use the “serial number of your
mobile phone / UIM”. If you select “Yes”, version upgrade
starts. In this case, your “mobile phone number / serial
number of UIM” is sent to the IP (Information Service Provider)
over the Internet, so could be deciphered by third parties.
However, your phone number, address, age, and gender are
not notified to the IP (Information Service Provider) or others
by this operation.
• If “Icon Info set” is set to “Use”, icon information for i-mode
mail, SMS, messageR/F, battery level, Manner mode, radio
wave strength and being out of area may be sent to the IP
(Information Service Provider) over the Internet just like your
“mobile phone number / serial number of UIM”, so could be
deciphered by third parties. However, your phone number,
address, age, and gender are not notified to the IP
(Information Provider) or others by this operation.
Pre-installed i-appli
This game is to remove the blocks when putting the block
has a same result after multiplying the serial number.
(Brain teaser by multiplication matrix)
1. From the screen of software list (P149), select
“”]C]Select the following menu
•I[Quit]: You can end a game.
Start 1
Starts the game.
Stage 1
You can select the stage (01~10) by pressing J
Continue 2
You can start the game on pause.
Key info
You can view the information of each button. After
displaying, when you press I[Menu], the menu is
returned back.
Help
You can view the information to remove the block.
After displaying, when you press J, you can change
the screen. If you press I[Menu], you can return to
menu.
Rank
You can view the status of score rank. After displaying,
you can return back to menu by pressing I[Menu].
Sound
You can set the sound of game. When you press C,
you can turn on or off sound.
1 : On pause the game, you cannot see these menus.
2 : On pause the game, you can see these menus.
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg99.png)
152
i-appli
i-appli
Screen on game
•M[Pause]/[Resume]: You can pause the game. If you
press it again, you can start it again.
•I[Menu]: After stopping the game, the menu will be
displayed.
Button activation on game
Go to Key info (P151) of menu for details.
Deleting the block
You can delete the falling blocks if you meet the condition.
When the blocks are full from 4th line to 7th line on left, the
game is over.
• In case the result after multiplying is two digits a, you
can paste the block beside same to the last number.
• See “Help” (P151), for the block except for number.
Game over
The screen of game over is displayed. If you press C,
you can view the score by displaying rank screen. If you
press I[Menu], you can return back to menu.
Information
• When you close the flip on game. the game is continuous.
Vertical direction Horizontal direction
< Combining the block of number 224>
All 3
blocks will
be
removed.
Ŀ
ŁĿ
Ł
If you remove the block, the number
will be reduced. If the number is 0,
the stage will be clear.
Indicates next block.
Indicates the current stage.
If the rest of block are done, the
block will be dropped beside 1 line.
Pause Menu
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg9a.png)
153
Introduction of Data box......................154
Displaying/Managing/
Editing Images......................................154
Playing back/Managing/
Editing Moving Images/i-motion .........161
Playing back/Managing/
Editing Melody......................................163
Caution on Use of the miniSD
Memory Card........................................166
Inserting/removing miniSD
memory card ........................................167
Playing back/Editing Data on
the miniSD Memory Card.....................168
Playing back i-motion (including of
music file) downloaded by other
devices in FOMA phone.......................169
Data box
On the Stand-by display,
C[Menu] ]or “Data box”
To display the Data box menu
1 My picture
2 i-motion
3 Melody
4 miniSD memory card
Select
Data box
Select
Data box
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg9b.png)
*You need to obtain a miniSD memory card separately to use the functions related to the miniSD memory card. >P166
154
Data box
Introduction of Data box
Data box has the following items and folders:
: Folders added by the user are not included.
Displaying/Managing/Editing Images
C]]
1
You can display the shot still images, or still images
obtained from sites or i-mode mail.
The File Format To Display
• This FOMA phone supports to display file format as follow.
: Some files cannot be played depending on the file format.
Data box
Menu item ContentsFolder
My picture
i-motion
Shot still images, etc.
Still images usable for
frames and elements
Pre-installed still
images
i-motion obtained from
sites, etc.
Pre-installed moving
images
Camera
Item
Pre-installed
Camera
i-mode
Pre-installed
Menu item ContentsFolder
Melody
miniSD memory
card
Pre-installed
i-motion
Melody
Melodies obtained from
sites, etc.
Pre-installed melodies
i-mode
My picture
Data transfer
Still images obtained
through data
transmission, etc.
Data transfer
Melodies obtained
through data
transmission, etc.
Data transfer
Moving images obtained
through data
transmission, etc.
i-mode Still images obtained
from sites, etc.
Shot moving images by
video camera etc.
The folder structure
and the files saved in
the folder are the
same as those of the
FOMA phone (above).
File format JPEG, GIF
Pixel/File size
Under 1280x1024 dots/Under 500Kbyte
Extension name jpg, gif
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg9c.png)
155
Data box
Data box
Displaying Images
1. From Data box menu (P153), “My picture”
<Folder List>
•I[View by] : You can select Simple list or Detailed
list depending on listing folder type.
2. Select a folder ]
C
•I[Mail] : You can send i-mode mail with attaching
an image file. Go to step 2 on page 139 of
“Composing message”.
3. Select a file ]
C
<Image>
•C[Full] : The image will be displayed fully.
•I[Mail] : You can send i-mode mail with attaching
the selected file. Go to step 2 on page 139 of
“Composing message”.
•J: Displays the previous/ next file.
The mark on the image file list
: The item is protected from sending the file except this FOMA
handset. You cannot edit the file or copy it from miniSD
memory card.
Menu Full Mail
File name
Go to My picture
Camera [1/11]
Menu Open Switch
File name and File size
being selected (in case
of files being selected )
Camera 5 Files
My picture [1/5]
Menu Open Switch
Folder name being selected
Number of files in the folder
being selected
DescriptionMark
Previous folder
The file set the limitation
Not recognized the file
<Image File List>
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg9d.png)
156
Data box
Data box
*You need to obtain a miniSD memory card separately to use the functions related to the miniSD memory card. >P166
Using the Submenu of the Folder List
Setting item/Setting at purchase >P246
1. From the Folder List (P155), M[Menu] ]Select
from the following Submenu items
Open
You can open the folder selected.
New folder 1
You can create a folder.
Delete 1 2
You can delete the folders selected.
Sort by
You can sort the folders.
View by
You can change folder display methods.
Memory info.
You can check status of the storage area on the
FOMA phone / miniSD memory card, etc.
Folder property
You can check the name, size and the number of the
files in the folder of the folder selected.
1: You cannot use this menu “My picture”, “i-motion”, “Melody” in
miniSD memory card.
2: You cannot use this menu in pre-installed folder.
Information
• If you delete each image which set as a wallpaper in stand-by
mode, phonebook, or video-phone call, each one can be
returned to pre-installed setting.
If you delete the melody set as ring tone, alarm, or schedule,
each one can be returned to pre-installed setting.
Using the Submenu of the Image File List Display
Setting item/Setting at purchase >P246
1. From the Image File List screen (P155), Select a file
]M[Menu] ]Select from the following
Submenu items
New folder 1
You can create a folder.
Files 1
–View : You can display the file selected.
–Edit 2 4 :You can edit the file selected. >P159
You can edit only JPEG file.
–Move 3:You can move the selected file to other
folder. “Handset memory”/“miniSD memory card”
>
Select the folder
C>I
[Paste].
–Copy 3:You can copy the selected file to other
folder. “Handset memory”/“miniSD memory card”
>
Select the folder
C>I
[Paste].
–Delete : You can delete the file selected.
–Delete all : You can delete all the files in the folder.
You need to enter your terminal security code for
deleting.
–Rename : You can change the name of the file
selected.
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg9e.png)
157
Data box
Data box
Mark/Unmark 1
You can move, copy, and delete after selecting
multiple files. After selecting, press M[Menu] >“File”
>Select “Move”/“Copy”/“Delete”
–Mark : You can select a file at a time.
–Mark all : You can select all the files collectively.
–Unmark : You can deselect the file selected by
“Mark” or one of the files selected by “Unmark all” at
a time.
–Unmark all : You can deselect the file selected by
“Mark” or all the files selected by “Unmark all”.
Send via mail 1 4
You can attach a file to i-mode mail for sending. Go to
step 2 (P139) of “Compose i-mode mail ”.
Set as wallpaper 5
Select the “Main display” or “Sub display” and set as
wall paper for the Stand-by display, etc.
Slide show
–Go : Files in the folder are displayed in order.
–Settings : You can set the “view as” and “Time
interval (secs)”. After setting, press I[Done].
Make animated GIF 1 4 5
You can select up to 10 files to create animation. After
the files, press I[Make].
Sort by
You can sort files.
View by
You can change file display methods.
Memory info.
You can check status of the storage area on the
FOMA phone / miniSD memory card, etc.
File property
You can check the name, size and type, date and
time, resolution, file restriction of the selected file.
1: You cannot use this menu in “Item”, “Pre-installed” folder.
2: When you have JPEG file (Except for not protection file), you
can use this menu.
3: You cannot move and copy this menu in “Item”, “Pre-installed”
folder.
4: You cannot use this menu in protection file.
5: You cannot use this menu in image saved in miniSD memory
card.
Information
• If you delete the image set in stand-by mode, phonebook, or
video-phone, each image will be returned to the setting at
purchase.
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg9f.png)
158
Data box
Data box
Using the Submenu of the Image Display
Setting items/Setting at purchase >P246
1. From the Image display (P155), M[Menu] ]Select
from the following Submenu itemsM
Files 1
–Delete : You can delete the file displayed.
–Rename : You can change the name of the file
displayed.
–Edit 2:You can edit the file displayed. >P159
Send via mail 1 3
You can attach a file to i-mode mail for sending. Go to
step 2 of “Compose i-mode mail” (P139).
Full
You can bring up an image on the full display hiding the
soft keys and display information.
•J: The previous image/next image is displayed.
•Q: The full display is cancelled.
Zoom
Displays an image in a large size.
•M: Every time you press M, the displayed image
is enlarged.
•I: The image is displayed in the previous size.
•K: You can move the position of display of the
expanded image.
•Q: The zoom is cancelled.
Set as wallpaper 4
Select the “Main display” or “Sub display” to set as
wallpaper for the Stand-by display.
Slide show
–Go : Files in the folder are displayed in order.
–Settings : You can set the “View as” and “Time
interval (secs)” for the slide show. After the setting,
press I[Done].
Go to list
The list screen reappears. (P155)
File property
You can check the name, size, and type , date and
time, resolution, file restriction of the selected file.
1: You cannot use this menu in “Item”, “Pre-installed” folder.
2: When you have JPEG file (Except for not protection file), you
can use this menu.
3: You cannot use this menu in protection file.
4: The image in miniSD memory can be disabled.
Information
• If you delete each image which set as a wallpaper in stand-by
mode, phonebook, or video-phone call, each one can be
returned to pre-installed setting.
• If the image in miniSD memory card, you cannot set it as a
wallpaper.
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bga0.png)
159
Data box
Data box
Next Page
Editing Still Images
You can edit a still image. The edited still image is saved into
the folder containing the original still image. There are some
cases where you may not be able to edit.
Setting items/Setting at purchase >P246
1. From the Image File List (P155) Display (P155),
Select a file, from the Image Display screen, Press
M[Menu] ]“Files” ]“Edit”
• The screen to edit the image is displayed.
2. From the Edit display, M[Menu] ]Select from the
following editing methods ]After setting,
C[Save]
• After editing in screen, you can operate the function
as follow.
–M[Menu]: Displays the menu to edit.
–I[Undo]: Returns back to previous menu
Save
You can save the edited still image.
Rotate
You can rotate a still image 90 degrees to the left or
to the right.
1) Left side / Right side
•M[Rotate]: You can rotate a still image 90 degrees
to the left or to the right.
•I[Cancel]: You can cancel editing.
2) Press C
Resizing
You can change the size of a still image.
Insert
–Text : You can paste a text to a still image.
• If you press M[Menu], you can change the
settings of “Font size” and “Font color”.
1) Select a text box ]C
2) Enter text ]C
•M[Text]: You can change the text box.
•I[Cancel]: Returns back to previous menu.
3) C]Select a position of the text using K]
C
–Frame : A frame is added to a still image.
Select a frame to set up.
1) ]C
•M[Rotate]: You can rotate a still image 180
degrees to the left or to the right.
•I[Cancel]: You can cancel editing.
2) Press C
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bga1.png)
160
Data box
Data box
*You need to obtain a miniSD memory card separately to use the functions related to the miniSD memory card. >P166
–Element : An element is pasted to a still image.
• If you press M[Menu], you can select a size of the
element from “Large”, “Medium” and “Small”.
1) Select an element ]C
2) Select a position to paste the stamp by K]
C
• If you continue to add same element, repeat step
2.
•M[More]: You can select each element.
3) I[Done]
Clipping
1) Select the size for trimming. ]C
• The range for trimming is marked in red line.
2) Select the position for trimming by pressing
K]C
• If you select User defined size, you can adjust the
coverage for trimming of each picture. You can
move the red cursor by pressing K, and then set
the starting and ending point for trimming by
pressing C.
Effect
–Black & White : Makes the color tone black and
white.
–Sepia : Makes the color tone sepia.
–Negative : Reverses the color tone.
–Black & White negative : Makes the color tone
black and white and reverses black and white.
–Color balance : Emphasizes or weakens light and
shade of colors such as red, green, blue.
–Contrast : Emphasizes or weakens contrast.
–Sharpness : Emphasizes the contour.
–Softness : Gradates the contour.
–Mosaic Blur : Applies the mosaic. Moves to red
line by pressing K, and then set the starting and
ending point to apply the mosaic by pressing C.
Mirror
Reverse the image horizontally.
Undo
Undoes the edited file.
This menu is not displayed if you select the file before being
edited.
Information
• You can “Resizing” only to make it smaller than the original still
image. You may not be able to change the size depending on
the display size of the original image.
• If a screen proportion of the size selected by “Resize” and is
different with the other size of still image, it can be saved by
other size, not selected one.
• In the size “1280 x 1024” of still image, you cannot set “Insert”
and “Effect”.
• The size for setting “Frame” is “352 x 288”, “320 x 240” “176 x
220”, “176 x 144”, “128 x 96”. You cannot set the other size to
“Frame”.
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bga2.png)
161
Data box
Data box
Next Page
• You cannot specify a display size larger than the original still
image to “Trimming”.
• The text box, Frame image, element at purchase, refer to “Text
box” (P251), “Frame” (P250), “Element” (P251) of “Appendix”.
• When the image size is over VGA(640X480), you cannot use
the function such as insert, effect, clipping.
• If aspect ratio for resizing of image is different with the ratio of
selected image, the image can be resized differing with the size
you want.
Playing back/Managing/
Editing Moving Images/i-motion
C]]
2
You can play back moving images shot by the camera, or
moving images obtained from sites, or from i-mode mail.
Playable file format
FOMA handset can play the file as follow.
• You cannot a few files depending on file format being compatible
with a phone.
Playing back Moving Images / i-motion
1. From the Data box menu (P153), “i-motion”
<Folder List>
•I[Switch] : You can change the type of display of
folder.
2. Select a folder ]C
<Moving image File List>
•I[Mail] : You can send i-mode mail with attaching
the selected file. Go to step 2 on page 139
“Composing message”.
• See step 2 “Display screen” (P155) for
the mark on display screen.
Go to i-motion
Camera [1/8]
Menu Open Switch
The name of file, the file size
(When selecting a file)
Voice file
Camera 5 File
i-motion [1 / 4]
Menu Open Switch
The folder name on selecting
The number of file in folder
Code system
File format
Extension name
MP4
MP4 file Image MPEG4, H.263,
Voice AAC, AMR
MP4, 3gp
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bga3.png)
162
Data box
Data box
3. Select a file ]C
<Moving Image Playback>
•C/G[Plays back]: Pauses
•I[Stop]: Stops
•J: Plays back the previous file / next file
•J(Press and hold): The images are fast forwarded
/ fast rewound while it is pressed
•H,FE: Adjust volume
Using the Submenu of the Folder List
See “Using the Submenu of the Folder List” of images (P155)
for the submenus available.
Using the Submenu of the Moving Image
File List
Setting item/Setting at purchase >P247
1. From the Moving Image File List (P161), Select a
file ]M[Menu] ]Select from the following
Submenu items
Play
Plays back the file selected.
New folder 1
You can create a folder.
Files 1
–Move 2:You can move the file selected to another
folder. “Handset memory”/“miniSD memory card” >
Select a folder to move >C>I[Paste].
–Copy 2:You can copy the file selected to another
folder. “Handset memory”/“miniSD memory card” >
Select a folder to move >C>I[Paste].
–Delete : You can delete the file selected.
–Delete all : You can delete all files in the folder. If
you delete all files, you enter a phone password.
–Rename : You can change the name of the file
selected.
Mark/Unmark 1
You can mark or unmark files. If you select this menu,
you can move, copy and delete multiple files. After
selecting , M[Menu] >“File” >Select “Move”/“Copy”/
“Delete”.
Menu Pause Stop
Volume
Playback bar
Playback elapsed time /
maximum playback time
Stereo / monaural
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bga4.png)
163
Data box
Data box
–Mark 2:You can select a file at a time.
–Mark all : You can select all the files collectively.
–Unmark : You can deselect the file selected by
“Mark” or one of the files selected by “Mark all” at a
time.
–Unmark all : You can deselect the file selected by
“Mark” or all the files selected by “Mark all”.
Send via mail 1 3
You can attach a file to i-mode mail for sending. Go to
step 2 (P139) of “Compose i-mode mail”.
Sort by
You can sort files.
View by
You can change file display methods.
Memory info.
You can check the status of the storage area on the
FOMA phone / miniSD memory card, etc.
File property
You can check the name, size, and type, date and
time, resolution, file restriction of the selected file.
1: You cannot use the file in “Pre-installed” folder.
2: You cannot move or copy the file in “Pre-installed” folder. Also,
you cannot move or copy the restriction file to miniSD memory
card.
3: You cannot use this menu in restriction file.
Using the Submenu of the Moving Image
Playback Screen
As for MP4 file, only voice, not recording the image, see
“Using the Submenu of the Melody Playback” (P166).
Setting item/Setting at purchase >P247
1. From the Moving Image Playback display (P162),
M[Menu] ]Select from the following Submenu
items
Pause 3(Play 5)
You can pause the moving images being played
back.
Send via mail 1 2
You can compose a message and attach it to i-mode
mail for sending. Go to step 2 (P139) of “Composing i-
mode message”.
Expand 3
You can view the whole moving image without displaying
the indication of soft key or player.
•
Q
: cancel this function.
Snap 124
You can save paused moving images as still images.
Snapped images are saved into the “Camera” folder
of “My picture”.
Mute (Unmute)
You can play back moving images muting the sound.
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bga5.png)
164
Data box
Data box
*You need to obtain a miniSD memory card separately to use the functions related to the miniSD memory card. >P166
Player settings
You can change settings of the visual effect and the
color tone of the player.
File property
You can display the name, size, and type of the file
selected.
1: You cannot use this menu in “Pre-installed” menu.
2: You cannot use this menu in restriction file.
3: You can use this menu on playing the file.
4: You can use this menu on pause.
5: You can use this menu after pausing or ending to play back the
file.
Playing back/Managing/Editing Melody
C]]
3
You can play back pre-installed melodies, and melodies
obtained from sites, etc.
Playable file format
• This FOMA phone supports to display file format as
follow.
1: Some files may not be played back in file format supported in
this phone.
2: The voice format of AAC or AMR of MPEG4 is saved as 3gp file
in “i-motion” folder.
Playing Back Melody
1. From the Data box menu (P153), “Melody”
<Folder List>
•I[Switch] : You can change the type of display of
folder.
2. Select a folder ]C
<Melody File List>
•I[Mail] : You can attach the file to i-mode mail.
Go to step 2 on page 139 of “Composing i-mode mail”.
• See step 2 “Display screen” for the mark
on display screen.
Pre-installed [1/46]
Menu Open Switch
Go to Melody
File name/File size
Melody [1/3]
Menu Open Switch
Data transfer
0 File
i-mode
0 File
Pre-installed
45 Files
Folder name
The number of files in a folder.
File format 1
Extension name
SMF, MFi, MP4 2
mid, mld
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bga6.png)
165
Data box
Data box
*You need to obtain a miniSD memory card separately to use the functions related to the miniSD memory card. >P166
3. Select a file ]C
<Melody Playback>
–C,G: Plays back / pauses
–J: Plays pack the previous file / next file
–J(Press and hold): Melodies are fast forwarded /
fast rewound while pressing it.
–H/FE: Adjusts the sound volume
–I[]: Sets the repeat area (Starting point/
Ending point) If you press in setting, you can
release it.
Using the Submenu on the Folder List
See “Using the Submenu of the Folder List” of Images (P156)
for the submenu items available.
Using the Submenu of the Melody File List
See “Using the Submenu of the i-motion File List” (P162)
for the Submenus available.
Information
• If you delete the melody set as the tone for incoming call,
alarm, and schedule, each melody returns to setting at
purchase.
Using the Submenu of the Melody Playback
Screen
Setting item/Setting at purchase >P247
1. From the Melody Playback display (P165),
M[Menu] ]Select from the following Submenu
items
Pause 5(Play 6)
You can pause the melody being played back.
Send via mail 1 2
You can attach melody files to i-mode mail for sending.
Go to step 2 (P139) of “Composing i-mode mail”.
Ringtones 2 3 4
You can set a ring tone for voice or video phone calls.
Mute (Unmute)
You can mute the tone for playing back melodies.
Volume
Playback bar
Playback elapsed time /
maximum playback time
Menu Pause
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bga7.png)
166
Data box
Data box
*You need to obtain a miniSD memory card separately to use the functions related to the miniSD memory card. >P166
Set repeat 3 4
You can select a repeat method.
–None : You can repeat none file.
–Current file ( ) : You can repeatedly play back
the current melody.
–All files ( ) : You can repeatedly play back all
the melodies in the folder.
–Shuffle : You can shuffle and play back all the
melodies in the folder.
Area repeat ( )5
You can specify a playback area for playing back
melodies. You can set the starting point ( ) and
ending point ( ) by pressing I[]. If you press in
setting, you can release it.
Player settings
You can change settings of the visual effect and the
color tone of the player.
File property
You can display the name, size, and type, date and
time, duration, ringtone, file restriction of the selected
file.
1: You cannot use the menu in pre-installed folder.
2: You cannot use this menu in restriction file.
3: You can use this menu in MP4 file, not recording the image.
4: You cannot use this menu in melody saved in miniSD memory
card.
5: You can use this menu on playing.
6: You can use this menu on pause or ending to play back.
7: You cannot use this menu on pause or ending to play back.
Information
• You can also change settings of the ring tone from the
Melody File List Screen. From the Melody File List screen
(P164), press M[Menu] select a “Ringtone”.
Caution on Use of the miniSD
Memory Card
You need to obtain a miniSD memory card separately
to use the functions related to the miniSD memory
card. The miniSD memory card is available at mass
retailers for home electric appliances, etc.
• The miniSD memory card adapter is available at mass
retailers for home electric appliances, etc.
• The FOMA L601i is compatible with a miniSD memory
card (commercial item) of up to 1G bytes (as of March
2006). However, this does not necessarily guarantee
the proper operation of each maker's miniSD memory
card. See the following for the latest information.
– i-mode: “i Menu” >“Menu list” >“Mobile Phone Maker”
>“WOWLG”
– PC : http://jp.lge.com/index.do
• You may not be able to use the miniSD memory card
you formatted using a personal computer and other
devices. Be sure to use the miniSD memory card
formatted with the FOMA L601i.
• The miniSD memory card may be lost or deformed due
to an accident or failure. It is advisable to back up
important data.
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bga8.png)
167
Data box
Data box
Next Page
• Note that we take no responsibility for direct or indirect
damages or incidental guarantee due to the use of the
miniSD memory card.
– Damages arising from missing opportunities of calls
or transmission
– Damages caused by erasing the data you saved in
the FOMA phone or miniSD memory card
• Damages caused by erasing the data you saved in the
FOMA phone or miniSD memory card During processing
of the card, never remove the miniSD memory card, or turn
off the FOMA phone. Confirm that processing of the card
does not go on before turning off the FOMA phone and
removing the miniSD memory card.
• The miniSD memory card has an operating life. If you
use the miniSD memory card for a long time, you may
not be able to write new data on it, or the card is
disabled.
• Do not delete or move folders in the miniSD memory
card using a personal computer. The FOMA L601i may
fail to read the miniSD memory card.
• If you have written the data incompatible with the
FOMA L601i on the miniSD memory card using a
personal computer, the FOMA L601i cannot read it.
• Do not insert or remove the miniSD memory card with
the FOMA phone turned on. It may damage the miniSD
memory card or its data.
• Note that miniSD memory card may pop out when you
insert or remove it.
• Confirm the direction of the miniSD memory card, and
then insert or remove it straight. (If you obliquely insert
the miniSD memory card into the slot, the memory card
may be damaged.)
• It may take long to select or display contents of the
miniSD memory card.
Inserting/removing miniSD
memory card
Inserting the memory card
1Open the cover of miniSD memory card's slot to an
arrow indication.
2Insert the miniSD memory card into the slot slowly to
listen to "click!" with the golden connectors facing up.
3Close the cover of miniSD memory card's slot to an
arrow indication.
2
3
1
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bga9.png)
168
Data box
Data box
*You need to obtain a miniSD memory card separately to use the functions related to the miniSD memory card. >P166
Removing the memory card
1Open the cover of miniSD memory card's slot to an
arrow indication.
2Push the miniSD memory card into the slot lightly.
• The miniSD memory card is released from the slot.
3Pull the memory card out of slot straightly.
4Close the cover of miniSD memory card's slot to an
arrow indication.
Playing back/Editing Data on the
miniSD Memory Card
C]]
4
You can insert a miniSD memory card into the FOMA phone
to use it as an external memory. If you insert it into a miniSD
memory card adapter, you can use a SD memory card-
enabled personal computer.
• When using a miniSD memory card for the first time, you
need to format it in accordance with “Resetting miniSD”
(P180). Be sure to format on the FOMA phone.
Information
• You can check usage status, and available space of the
miniSD memory card. . >P156, P157, P163.
Folder Configuration on miniSD Memory Card
aTo be displayed by FOMA Phone
For “Introduction of Data box” (P154), see “miniSD
memory card” on the cover.
When you move/copy the file from FOMA phone to
miniSD memory card or save the still image and moving
image in miniSD memory directly, the folder being
compatible with a file is created automatically in miniSD
memory card.
• When moving/copying files from a personal computer
to the miniSD memory card, you need to adopt the
following folder configuration.
2
3
4
1
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bgaa.png)
169
Data box
Data box
1: i-motion includes of music file.
2: This folder indicates the still image or thumb mark of moving
image. The folder is composed automatically after saving the
file in “1 my picture”, “2 i-motion”. Do not delete/ move/ save
the file in this folder.
Information
• A folder name or file name has a limit in the number of
characters. The number of characters is except for the
number of extension name.
– Folder name : Up to 15 characters
– File name : Up to 36 characters
Copying / Moving Files between the FOMA
Phone and the miniSD Memory Card
See “Copy” and “Move” of “Using the Submenu of the
Image File List” (P156) or “Using the Submenu of the Moving
image File List” (P162) for the operation method.
Displaying / Playing Back Files on the
miniSD Memory Card
• On the FOMA phone, you might not be able to display or
play data which was saved to the miniSD memory card
from other devices.
1. From the Data box menu (P153), “miniSD memory
card”
• See “Displaying Images” (P155), “Playing Back Moving
Images / i-motion Movies” (P161) and “Playing Back
Melodies” (P164) for the subsequent operations.
Playing back i-motion (including of
music file) in FOMA phone
C]]
5
You can play the music downloaded from internet or CD in
FOMA phone after saving them in miniSD memory card.
You need to obtain a miniSD memory card separately to use
the functions related to the miniSD memory card. The
miniSD memory card is available at mass retailers for home
electric appliances etc. >P166
miniSD
1 my picture.......Folder to save still images
2 i-motion...........Folder to save moving images
/i-motionŦ1 movies
3 melody.............Folder to save melodies
privateŦ2
lge
thumb
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bgab.png)
170
Data box
Data box
*You need to obtain a miniSD memory card separately to use the functions related to the miniSD memory card. >P166
• The music file saved in miniSD memory card should be
treated by personal use.
• Be sure not to infringe on the intellectual property rights
and the others of copy-right of third party .
• Do not move or exchange the music file saved in miniSD
memory card to other devices such as personal
computer.
1. You can change the file format from music file of
CD to AAC (3gp) by using the software to convert
the extension.
For details about software, please contact the homepage of
software provider.
2. After inserting miniSD memory card to personal
computer, you can copy the music file in “2 i-
motion” folder. (P169)
• The file name of step 1 is written by half-pitch, so you
change the name within 36 characters.
aIn case of not existing the “2 i-motion” folder
The FOMA phone creates the folder automatically by
selecting “Data box” >“miniSD memory card” after
inserting miniSD memory card. And then, you insert the
card into personal computer after removing it FOMA
phone.
3. After inserting miniSD memory card into FOMA
phone (P167), press Cin stand-by mode ]“Data
box” ]“miniSD memory card” ]Select “i-motion”
folder ]C]Select the file to play ]C
• After this step, Go to step 3 on page 162 of “Playing
back Moving Images/i-motion”.
Information
• In FOMA phone, the music file cannot be played back
continuously despite saving the multiple files.
• Although you close the flip, the music can be played back
continuously. But, you cannot control the volume.
• If you connect a Flat-plug Earphone/Microphone Set (P29),
you can listen to the music by headphone.
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bgac.png)
171
Using Alarm ..........................................172
Setting the Custom Menu ....................173
Using the Infrared Exchange
Function................................................174
Using Calculator...................................175
Using Unit Converter............................176
Using World Time.................................178
Using Stop Watch ................................179
Using the miniSD Memory Card ..........179
Tools
On the Stand-by display,
C[Menu] ]or “Tools”
To display the Tools menu
1 Alarm
2 Custom menu
3 IrDA
4 Calculator
5 Unit converter
6 World time
7 Stop watch
Select
Tools
Select
Tools
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bgad.png)
172
Tools
Using Alarm
C]]
1
You can set Alarm to alert you at the specified time. You
can also set Snooze or an alarm tone.
Setting Alarm
Setting item/Setting at purchase >P230
1. From the Tools menu (P171), “Alarm”
<Alarm List>
•I[ON]/[OFF] : You can set the alarm ON or OFF.
2. Select the alarm to edit ]C]Select the item to
edit ]C]After editing, I[Done].
(Setting ON/OFF)
You can select “ON” or “OFF”. To set Alarm, select
“ON”.
Time setting
You can set the time for making the alarm sound.
(Setting repeat)
You can select the type of repeat.
• If you set “Except holiday”, the alarm does not alert
on Sunday or holiday (P184).
(Melody)
You can select an alarm tone.
• Select from alarm tone stored in “Melody” in “Data
box”. >P164
(Memo)
You can enter an alarm name.
(Snooze)
Select the time intervals of Snooze. If you do not want
to use Snooze, select “OFF”.
When the Specified Time Comes
When the specified time comes, the display informing of
Alarm appears. To stop Alarm, do the following operations:
•C[OFF]: You can cancel the setting of alarm. If you set
the snooze, you can cancel it.
•I[Snooze]: Alarm stops. The set Snooze continues.
aDuring a Voice/Video-phone Call
An alarm does not sound at the specified time during a
call because the icon is not displayed on upper side. After
ending the call, the alarm will be alerted on time.
09 : 00
ɺˁĜʸāǍ
09 : 00
ɺˁĜʸāǎ
09 : 00
ɺˁĜʸāǏ
09 : 00
ɺˁĜʸāǐ
Alarm
Menu Edit OFF
Tools
DescriptionIcon
Alarm is set to “ON”
Alarm is set to repeat
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bgae.png)
173
Tools
Tools
Next Page
• After ending to play a file/to take image, the alarm will
be sounded with displaying alarm screen.
aDuring playing back moving image, melody/
activating camera, video camera
An alarm does not sound at the specified time during a
call because the icon is not displayed on upper side.
After ending the call, the alarm will be alerted on time.
Information
• If the UIM is not installed, the FOMA phone does not turn on
and the alarm does not sound.
• If the alarm cannot be sounded during activating i-appli, the
alarm icon blinks on upper of the screen instead of alarm
sound.
Using the Submenu of the Alarm List Screen
1. From the Alarm List screen (P172),
M[Menu]
]
Select from the following Submenu items
Edit
You can edit the selected alarm. Go to step 2 on page
172 of “Setting alarm”.
ON/(OFF)
You can activate/deactivate the selected alarm.
Mark/Unmark
After editing the alarm, you can select ON or OFF.
–Mark: You can mark one alarm at a time.
–Mark all: You can mark all alarms at once.
–Unmark:
You can unmark one alarm at a time, which
you selected by “Mark” or “Mark all”.
–Unmark all: You can collectively unmark all alarms
you selected by “Mark” or “Mark all”.
Setting the Custom Menu
C]]
2
You can specify functions to store in the Custom menu. If
you store functions frequently used in the Custom menu,
you can quickly start the functions simply by pressing
Don the Stand-by display.
Setting item/Setting at purchase >P232
1.
From the Tools menu (P171), “Custom menu”
<Custom Menu>
•C[Select]: You can activate the selected menu.
•I[Edit]: You can change the menu saved as
Custom.
1 Search phonebook
2 Mail
3 i-mode
4 Camera-mode
5 Alarm
6 Select ringtone
7 [Menu7]
Custom menu
Menu Select Edit
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bgaf.png)
174
Tools
Tools
2. Use Hto select a blank line ]I[Add]
• The list of functions that can be stored in the Custom
menu appears.
3. Select a function ]C
• You cannot select the menu which is already
registered.
Using the Submenu of the Custom Menu
Display
1.
From the Custom menu display (P173), M[Menu]
]
Select from the following Submenu items
Add new 1
You can add a function to be registered from the
function list. Go to step 3 of “Setting the Custom
Menu” (See above).
Open 2
You can start the function selected.
Edit 2
You can change the functions registered. Go to step
3 of “Setting the Custom Menu” (See above).
Delete 2
You can delete a function registered.
Delete all
You can delete all the functions registered.
1: This Submenu item is displayed when a blank line is selected.
2: This Submenu item is displayed when a registered function is
selected.
Using the Infrared Exchange Function
C]]
3
You can send and receive data such as Phonebook and
Bookmark by using the infrared exchange to and from other
FOMA phones and personal computers supporting the
infrared exchange function.
The data to send by infrared
: You cannot send or receive the image registered in
phonebook.
Performing Infrared Exchange
Place the FOMA phone parallel to another device so that the
infrared data ports of these devices face each other.
• The infrared data port is located on the right side of the
FOMA phone. >P28
• Place the FOMA phone on a stable location such as a
table and do not move it during communication.
• The distance for infrared exchange should be within 20
cm.
Data Contents
1 available (Phonebook of
FOMA phone)
1 available
Own number
Phonebook
Bookmark
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bgb0.png)
175
Tools
Tools
Information
• During infrared exchange, do not remove the battery. If you
remove the battery during exchange the data via infrared, this
operation will be stopped.
• If the battery is low, you cannot exchange the data via infrared.
Before activating this menu, check the capacity of battery.
• During data exchange by infrared when receiving a voice call
or video-phone call, you can get a call with stopping to
exchange infrared. If you don't send or receive the data,
activate infrared function again after ending a call.
• Receiving the data by infrared can be dependent on the
capacity of memory. If you cannot receive the data, delete
unnecessary data, and then activate infrared menu again.
• Before activating the infrared between the other phone, you
check the compatibility of each equipment.
• You might not be able to exchange the data by infrared
depending on the type of FOMA phone or personal computer.
Sending Data
Make the receiving end ready for receiving the data and
then start sending data within 30 seconds following the
steps below.
1. Display of the data to be sent
]
M[Menu]
]
“Send Ir data”
2. Make sure that the receiving end is ready for
receiving the data
]
“Yes”
Receiving Data
1. From the Tools menu (P171), “IrDA”
2. Send data at the sending end
3. Receive the data
Using Calculator
C]]
4
You can perform calculation such as addition, subtraction,
multiplication, and division. Use the numeric buttons to
enter numbers. For other operations, follow the
instructions on the display.
1.
From the Tools menu (P171), Select “Calculator”
< Calculator screen >
•*: Used for enter decimal number.
•#: Used for enter the parenthesis.
•Q: Userd for delete the number to backward.
•I[AC]: You can delete the number or cancel the
calculation.
Calculator
func.
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bgb1.png)
176
Tools
Tools
Using the Function Menu of the Calculator Display
1.
From the Calculator display (P175), M[func]
]Select from the following function menu items
+/-
Switches between positive and negative numbers
sin
Used for calculation of trigonometric functions.
cos
Used for calculation of trigonometric functions.
tan
Used for calculation of trigonometric functions.
log
Used for calculation of logarithmic functions.
ln
Used for calculation of natural logarithms.
exp
Used for calculation of exponential functions.
sqrt
Used for calculation of square roots (root).
deg
Specifies the unit of angle to “degree”.
rad
Specifies the unit of angle to “radian”.
Using Unit Converter
This is useful function to convert currency, surface, length,
weight, temperature, volume, and velocity.
Converting Unit of Currency
C]]
51
This is a useful function for converting the yen on hand to
the dollar, etc.
Setting at purchase >P232
1. From the Tools menu (P171), “Unit converter” ]
“Currency”
• The screen for converting a currency is displayed.
(P177)
2. Select the currency ]I[Rate]
<Currency Unit Conversion>
0
0
0
Current rate
Done
Setting for currency name
Setting for currency rate
123
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bgb2.png)
177
Tools
Tools
3. Select next item ]After setting, press I[Done].
Currency unit field
Select the unit of the currency. If you press C, you
can edit the currency. But, you cannot change “ ”.
Value Entry field
You can set the rate of currency. For example, in case
you convert from to (Ex. 1 120
), you can set to 120, to 1.
•#: Enters the decimal point.
•Q: Deletes the character which you enter.
Converting the currency
The currency setting the rate converts to the other
currency. You can enter the currency in up/ down field to
input. The field not input will be displayed the value after
converting.
1. “Unit converter” from “Tool”(P171) ]“Currency”
<Currency conversion display>
2. Select next item.
Currency unit field
You can set the unit of the exchange rate.
Exchange rate entry field
You can enter the exchange rate.
•#: You can enter decimal number.
•Q: Deletes the character which you enter.
•I[Reset]: The numerical value is reset.
Currency
Menu List Rate
Exchange rate 120 : 1
Exchange rate 1 : 1
0
0
Rate unit field
Currency unit field
Value entry field
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bgb3.png)
178
Tools
Tools
*You need to obtain a miniSD memory card separately to use the functions related to the miniSD memory card. >P166
Converting Unit of Surface
C]]
52
You can change the unit of surface. You can enter the
unit in up/ down field to input. The field not input will be
displayed the value after converting.
Setting item/Setting at purchase >P232
1. From the Tools menu (P171), “Unit converter” ]
“Surface”
• The Surface Unit Conversion display appears
<Surface Unit Conversion>
Surface unit field
You can select the unit of surface.
• You can convert the surface unit either from top or
bottom.
Value entry field
Enter a numerical value of the surface to be converted.
•#: Enters the decimal point.
•Q: Deletes the number which you already
entered.
•I: [Reset]: The numerical value is reset.
Converting Unit of Length/Weight/
Temperature/Volume/Velocity
C]]
53~7
Setting item/Setting at purchase >P232,P233
1. From the Tools menu (P171), “Unit converter”
]“Length”/“Weight”/“Temperature”/“Volume”/“Ve
locity”
• For the subsequent operations, follow the same
operations as “Converting Unit of Surface” (see left).
Using World Time
C]]
6
You can check the date and time of major cities in the
world.
The time of city “Home” is set by the time of “Setting
date/time” (P86).
Surface unit field
Value entry field
Surface
List
Acre
0
0
Hectare
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bgb4.png)
179
Tools
Tools
1.
From the Tools menu (P171), “World time”
<World Time>
•C[List]: You can select a city to display the city list.
2. Use Jto select a city to be checked
•I[Set]: The selected city is set as Home.
Using the Submenu of the World Time Display
Setting item/Setting at purchase >P233
1. From the World time display (see above),
M[Menu]
]
Select from the following Submenu
items
Choose city
You can choose a city. After choosing press C.
Set time zone
Sets the home country time zone.
: This menu is not displayed if you select the city as a home.
Using Stop Watch
C]]
7
You can use the FOMA phone as a stop watch.
1. From the Tools menu (P171), Select “Stop watch”
•C[Go]/[Stop]: You can start or stop counting.
•I[Reset]: You can reset the result of counting.
• During counting, you can do the following
operations.
–I[Lap]: The lap time is recorded and displayed at
the bottom of the display.
–M[Detail]: You can view the list of the lap records.
Using the miniSD Memory Card
You can check data or files saved in the miniSD memory
card. You can also check the usage status/free space of
the memory and can format (initialize) the miniSD memory
card.
Using Data box
C]]
81
1.
From the Tools menu (P171), “miniSD memory card”
]“Data box”
• You can check or play back the still images, moving
images/i-motion movies and melody files saved in
“miniSD memory card” of “Data box”. >P155, P161,
P164
Tokyo
Jan 01 (Sun) 06 : 37
Home: Tokyo
Jan 01 (Sun) 06 : 37
World time
Menu List
The date and time set as
home city
The city name and time
which are checked
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bgb5.png)
180
Tools
Tools
*You need to obtain a miniSD memory card separately to use the functions related to the miniSD memory card. >P166
Checking Memory Information
C]]
82
You can check the usage status or free space of the
miniSD memory card.
Setting item/Setting at purchase >P233
1.
From the Tools menu (P171), “miniSD memory card”
]“Memory info.” ] Select an item to be checked
Formatting the miniSD Memory Card
C]]
83
You can format the miniSD memory card to use it on the
FOMA phone.
1.
From the Tools menu (P171), “miniSD memory card”
] “Reset miniSD card” ] “miniSD”
Information
• Resetting deletes all the files saved in the miniSD memory card.
Please make sure that no important files are saved in the
miniSD memory card before formatting.
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bgb6.png)
181
Using Schedule....................................182
Using Memo.........................................185
Using Date Search...............................186
Using Date Counter .............................186
Stationery
On the Stand-by display,
C[Menu] ]or “Stationery”
To display the Stationery menu
1 Scheduler
2 Memo
3 Date search
4 Date counter
Select
Stationery
Select
Stationery
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bgb7.png)
182
Stationery
Using Schedule
C]]
1
Storing Schedule Events
1. From the Stationery menu (P181), “Scheduler”
– The monthly display (P183) appears.
2. Select a date to store a schedule event. ]I[Add]
<Add new schedule display>
3. Select from the following items to store ]After
storing, I[Done]
Start date
You can set a date to start the schedule event. You
can enter a date by pressing Rand dial buttons.
You can select a date from the calendar display by
pressing C.
End date
You can set a date to end the schedule event. You
can enter a date by pressing Jand dial buttons.
You can select a date from the calendar display by
pressing C.
None 1(Schedule type)
You can set a type of the schedule event.
Time
You can set time to start and end the schedule event.
–All day: The schedule event is stored as an all-day
event.
–Set time:: You can set time to start and end the
event by selecting the time field. You can enter the
time by using Jand dial buttons.
Subject
You can set a subject of the schedule event. You
cannot store the event without entering a subject.
Alarm
You can set whether or not to be notified by an alarm
when the date and time specified in “Start date” and
“Time” come. You can select a melody 1when the alarm
function is set to other than “No alarm”.
• You can select the menu from “Melody” of “Data box”.
>P164
Repeat 2
You can set the repeat setting for the schedule event.
If you do not want to repeat it, select “Once”
1: The content you've set is displayed.
Edit
Add new
ǎnjnjǒğnjǒğnjǍāĪǰȄȑī
None
Time
Subject
All day
njnjćnjnjā
ġ
āǎǏćǑǕ
Done
Stationery
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bgb8.png)
183
Stationery
Next Page
Stationery
2: If “Start date” and “End date” are different, you use only
“Once”.
Information
• When the specified time of a schedule event setting by alarm
comes, the display to notify it appears.
–C[OK]: After stopping the alarm, you can view the time and
the subject of schedule. If you press Cagain, the alarm will
be released.
–I[Snooze]: You can set the snooze.
• As for the operation of alarm setting during a call or taking a
photo, see “When the Specified Time Comes” (P172).
Checking Schedule Events
1.
From the Stationery menu (P181), “Scheduler”
<Monthly Display>
•13: You can move the year of date.
•79/FE: You can move the month of date.
•5: You can move the current date .
•I[Add]: You can add your own schedule.
Go to step 3
on page 182 of “Storing Schedule Events”.
2. Select a date in which a schedule event is stored
]C
<Daily Display>
•I[Add]: You can add your own schedule.
Go to step 3
on page 182 of “Storing Schedule Events”.
•J
: Displays the schedule of previous and next day.
3. Select a schedule event ] C
<Display>
• For details, see page 182.
10 : 00am ~ 11 : 00am
Alarm01.mid
2006/06/01 (Thu)
None
Umbrella
No alarm
Once
View (20/23)
Edit Delete
2006/06/01 (Thu)
Menu Select Add
00 : 00 ~ 23 : 59
ā
ȥȜȹɄ
00 : 00 ~ 23 : 59
ā
ɄȥȜȹɄ
The number of schedule events stored
in the date on which the cursor is place
Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su
2006 June
Menu Select Add
The date registered the schedule
will be underlined.
DescriptionIcon
Sets the alarm setting.
Sets the repeat setting.
DescriptionIcon
Start date of schedule
End date of schedule
The type of schedule
Holiday
Alarm
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bgb9.png)
184
Stationery
Stationery
•C[Edit]: You can edit the selected schedule. Go to
step 3 on page 182 of “Storing Schedule Events”.
•I[Delete]: You can delete this selected schedule.
•J: Displays the previous and next schedule.
Using the Submenus of the Monthly Display
1.
From the monthly display (P183),
M
[Menu] ]Select
from the following submenu items.
Add new
You can add a new schedule event. See Step 2
(P182) of “Storing Schedule Events”.
Open
You can see the details of the schedule events of the
selected date (Daily display).
Set holiday
You can set the selected date to holiday. After
entering the date for holiday, press I[Done]. The
setting date is marked in red color.
–On the day: Enter the holiday name and set the
selected date as a holiday.
–Weekly: Enter the holiday name and set the day of
the selected date as a holiday for every week.
–Monthly: Enter the holiday name and set the
selected date as a holiday for every month.
–Annually: Enter the holiday name and set the
selected date as a holiday for every year.
–Duration (2~31): Enter the holiday name and set
the holiday period and its title.
Go to date
The cursor is moved to the specified date. You can
enter a date by pressing Jand dial buttons.
Delete
–Holiday: All the schedule events set as holidays are
deleted.
–Old schedules: Deletes all the schedule events
stored for up to the preceding day of the selected
date are deleted.
–Current day schedules: The schedule events of
the selected date are deleted.
–Current week schedules: All the schedule events
of the week of the selected date are deleted.
–Current month schedules: All the schedule events
of the month of the selected date are deleted.
–All schedules: All the schedule events are deleted.
: You cannot the menu if select the date which you've already set
“Set holiday”.
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bgba.png)
185
Stationery
Stationery
Using the Submenus of the Daily Display Screen
1. From the Daily display screen (P183), M[Menu] ]
Select from the following Submenu items
Add new
You can add a new schedule event. See Step 3
(P182) of “Storing Schedule Events”.
Open
The details of the selected schedule event (Display
screen) are displayed.
Edit 1 2
You can edit the selected schedule event. See Step 3
on page 182 of “Storing Schedule Events”.
Set holiday 1 2
You can set the selected date as a holiday. See
“Holiday settings” of “Using the Submenus of the
Monthly Display Screen” (P184) for the setting items.
Mark/Unmark
You can delete all after selecting multiple schedules.
After selecting, press I[Delete].
Go to Date
Displays the schedule you've already set. You can
enter a date by pressing Jand dial buttons.
Delete
You can delete schedule events.
1: You cannot use this menu when you select the date which is
already set as the holiday in “Set holiday”.
2: You cannot use this menu When you select the date which is
already set as the holiday of screen “1day” displayed.
Using Memo
C]]
2
Creating Memo
You can create and save a memo.
1. From the Stationery menu (P181), “Memo”
• The memo display (See right) appears.
2. I[Add] ]Enter a memo ]C
Viewing Memo
You can view the memo that you created.
1. From the Stationery menu (P181), “Memo”
<Memo>
2. Select a memo to view ]C
•
The screen will be displayed.
Memo (1/2)
Menu Select Add
2006/06/01 (Thu)
Meeting June 1
2006/06/01 (Thu)
Video-phone call
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bgbb.png)
186
Stationery
Stationery
•C[Edit]: You can edit the selected memo.
•I[Delete]: You can delete the selected memo.
•J
: Displays the previous and next memo.
Using the Submenus of the Memo Display/
Display Screen
1. From the Memo display (P185)/Display screen
(P185), M[Menu] ]Select from the following
submenu items
Add new
You can create a memo. See Step2 (P185) of
“Creating memo”.
Open
The display screen of the selected memo is displayed.
Edit
You can edit the selected memo. See Step2 (P185) of
“Creating memo”.
Mark/Unmark
This function is used when you select and delete
multiple memos. After selecting, press I[Delete].
Delete
You can delete the memo selected or displayed.
: This menu is not displayed in submenus of screen.
Using Date Search
C]]
3
You can search for the date the target date after a specified
period from a specified date. For instance, you can search for
the date after 90 days from the current date for convenience.
1.
From the Stationery menu (P181), “Date search”
]
Select from the following setting items
•I[Reset]: You can reset all values of setting.
From
You can enter a date to start the search. Enter the
date by using Jand the dial buttons.
After
You can enter the number of days. Use the numeric
keys to enter the number of days. For instance, if you
want to know the date after 90 days from the “Start
date,” enter 90.
Using Date Counter
C]]
4
If you store the name and date of an event such as a
birthday, you can check how many days remain before
the event or how many days have passed after the event.
Storing Events in Date Counter
1. From the Stationery menu (P181), “Date counter”
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bgbc.png)
187
Stationery
Next Page
Stationery
• The Date counter display (P187) appears.
2. I[Add] ]Select from the following setting items
]After setting, I[Done]
(Date)
You can set the date of an event. Enter the date by
using Jand the dial buttons.
(Memo)
You can enter a memo. You cannot set without
entering.
Displaying Date Counter
1. From the Stationery menu (P181), “Date counter”
<Date Counter>
I[Add]: You can compose the date counter. Go to
step 2 (See above) of “Storing Events in Date
Counter”.
2. Select a date counter ]C
<Display Screen>
•C[Edit]: You can edit the selected daily counter. Go
to step 2 (See left) of “Storing Events in Date
Counter”.
•I[Delete]: You can delete the selected daily counter.
•J: Displays the date counter of previous and next
day.
Using the Submenu of the Date Counter
Display/Display Screen
1. From the Date counter display (See left)/display
screen (See above), M[Menu] ]Select from the
following submenu items
Add new
You can store an event to the date counter. See
Step2 (See left ) of “Storing Events in Date Counter”.
View (1/2)
Menu Edit Delete
2006/05/31 (Wed)
D-day : -1
Meeting
Date counter (1/2)
Menu Select Add
Meeting - 1
ǎnjnjǒğnjǑğǏǍ
Destination +16
ǎnjnjǒğnjǒğǍǓ
– before a number: The number of days
before the specified date
+ before a number: The number of days
after the specified date
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bgbd.png)
188
Stationery
Stationery
Open
You can view the selected date counter.
Edit
You can edit the date counter selected or displayed.
See Step2 of “Storing Events in Date Counter”.
Mark/unmark
This function is used when you select and delete
multiple date counters. After selecting, press I
[Delete].
Delete
You can delete the date counter selected or
displayed.
: This menu is not displayed in submenus of screen.
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bgbe.png)
189
Available Network Services .................190
Using Voice Mail ...................................190
Using Call Waiting Service...................192
Using Call Forwarding Service.............193
Using Nuisance Call Barring Service...194
Using Caller ID Notification Service ....194
Using Caller ID Request Service..........194
Using Set Arrival Act ............................195
Selecting Arrival Call Act......................195
Registering Additional Services...........196
Registering Additional Guidance .........196
Using English Guidance .......................197
Using Service Dialing Number .............198
Using Call Barring.................................198
Network Service
On the Stand-by display,
C[Menu] ]or “NW service”
To display the Network service menu
Select
NW service
1 Voice mail
2 Call waiting
3 Call forwarding
4 Nuisance call barring
5 Caller ID notification
6 Caller ID request
7 Set arrival act
Select
NW service
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bgbf.png)
Available Network Services
The following are the DoCoMo Network Services available
from the FOMA phone:
• See “Network Services User's Guide” for more details.
• Not all services described in “Network Services User's
Guide” are supported.
• Contact “DoCoMo Information Center” on the back
page of this manual for subscription or inquiry for the
Network Services.
Information
• The Network Services that are operated by connecting to the
Network Service Center are not available when you are out of
the service area.
• You can store services newly provided by DoCoMo Network
Services in the FOMA phone. >P196
Using Voice Mail
C]]
1
If your FOMA phone is out of the service area or the
power is turned off, or when you cannot answer a call
within the set time, the Voice Mail Center holds voice mail
messages on behalf of you. You can check the voice mail
message anywhere in Japan.
•
If a call comes in from a caller not notifying caller ID with
“Caller ID request” activated, the Caller ID Request
guidance is played back and the center will not hold voice
mail messages.
• Even if Voice Mail is activated, incoming video-phone
calls will not be connected to the Voice Mail Center,
and the call is disconnected after the duration set in
ringing time for Voice mail elapsed.
190
Network Service
Network Service
Service
Reference
Monthly feeApplication
Voice Mail
See Right
ChargedRequired
Call Waiting Service P192ChargedRequired
Call Forwarding Service
P193FreeRequired
Nuisance Call Barring Service
P194FreeRequired
P194Free
Not required
Caller ID Notification Service
P194Free
Not required
English Guidance
Not required
Free P197
Service Dialing Number
Not required
Free P198
Caller ID Request Service
Public mode (power off)
Not required
Free P49
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bgc0.png)
191
Network Service
Network Service
1. From the Network Service menu (P189), Voice mail
]Select from the following setting items
Activate voice mail
You can start using Voice Mail.
Set ringing time
You can set the time from the first ring until the call is
connected to the Voice Mail Service Center
Deactivate voice mail
You can stop using Voice Mail.
Voice mail status request
You can check the current settings of Voice Mail
Service.
• If you press M[Menu] in setting confirmation
screen, you can set the service of voice mail or
ringing time.
Play messages
You can play back messages recorded as Voice Mail.
Voice mail setting
You can connect to the Voice Mail Service Center to
change the settings of Voice Mail by following the
voice guidance.
Check messages
You can check whether or not new messages are
recorded.
Notify missed call
If the FOMA phone is turned off or out of the service
area, you are informed by SMS (Short Message Service)
of missed calls when the FOMA phone is turned on or in
the service area again.
–Activate missed call notification: You can start
using Missed Call Notice Service.
–Deactivate missed call notification: You can
stop using Missed Call Notice Service.
–Missed call notification status request: You can
check the settings of the Missed Call Notice Service.
Delete voice mail icon
You can delete displayed in the icon view area.
Set message alert ringer
You can set the ring tone to sound when a new
message is recorded.
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bgc1.png)
192
Network Service
Network Service
Using Call Waiting Service
C]]
2
When you receive another voice call during a call, you can
put the current call on hold to answer the new call. You
can also make a call to another party by putting the
current call on hold.
•
For details related to catch phone, refer to “Network
service operation guide”.
• When using Call Waiting, set “Arrival call act” to Voice
call >Answer. >P195
•
If a call comes in from a caller not notifying caller ID while
Caller ID Request Service is set to “Activate caller ID
Request”, the Caller ID Request guidance is played back
and Call Waiting is not available.
• When a video-phone call comes in during a voice call,
or a voice call comes in during a video-phone call, Call
Waiting does not work. The second call is recorded as
a missed call in Received Calls.
1. From the Network Service menu (P189), “Call
waiting” ]Select from the following setting items
Activate call waiting
You can start using Call Waiting Service.
Deactivate call waiting
You can stop using Call Waiting Service.
Call waiting status request
You can check whether the Call Waiting Service is
activated or deactivated.
Submenus on using Call Waiting Service
• If you press M, you can view the sub-menus.
aWhen a new call comes in during a call
Voice mail 1
When a new call comes in, the caller can connect the
voice mail center.
Call rejection
You can reject a call without receiving the call.
Call forwarding 2
You can forward the incoming call to the forwarding
destination you have registered.
End active call
You can answer a new call after finishing the current
call.
Mute/Unmute
The voice to send to the other party is set to mute or
unmute.
1: You can use the voice mail service when you have signed up
this service. See “Using Voice Mail” (P190) for details.
2: You can use the call forwarding service when you have signed
up this service. See next page for details.
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bgc2.png)
193
Network Service
Network Service
aWhen you receive a new call during a call
End
–End active call: After ending a call, you can take
the new call on hold.
–End held call: You can end a call on hold.
–End all calls: You can end all calls of both side.
Mute/Unmute
The voice to send to the other party is set to mute or
unmute.
Using Call Forwarding Service
C]]
3
You can forward an incoming call to the forwarding
number you have registered in advance when the FOMA
phone is turned off or out of the service area.
•
If a call comes in from a caller not notifying caller ID while
Caller ID Request Service is set to “Activate caller ID
Request”, the Caller ID Request guidance is played back
and the call is not forwarded.
• Call Forwarding Service will be automatically
deactivated if “Voice Mail Service” is set to “Activate
Voice mail”.
• This service is not available with some billing plans.
1. From the Network Service menu (P189), “Call
forwarding” ]Select from the following setting
items
Activate call forwarding
You can start using Call forwarding Service.
–Register fwd number: You can store the phone
number of the forwarding destination. If you press
M[Search], you can search for phonebook.
–Set ringing time: You can set the time from the
first ring until the call is forwarded.
Deactivate call forwarding
You can stop using Call forwarding Service.
Register the forwarding number
You can change the phone number of the forwarding
destination. If you press M[Search], you can search
for phonebook.
Setting at forwarded party busy
You can set an incoming call to be connected to the
Voice Mail Service Center if the forwarded destination
is busy.
Call forwarding status request
You can check the current settings of Call Forwarding
Service.
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bgc3.png)
194
Network Service
Network Service
Using Nuisance Call Barring Service
C]]
4
You can set the FOMA phone to block calls from specific
phone numbers, such as mischievous calls or nuisance
calls. If a call comes in from the phone number stored, the
FOMA phone plays the Call Rejection guidance and the
call is disconnected.
1. From the Network Service menu (P189),
“Nuisance call barring” ]Select from the
following setting items
Register nuisance caller
You can register the phone number of the call that
you answered the last for rejection.
Delete all entries
All the phone numbers registered for rejection are
deleted.
Delete most recent entry
You can delete the latest phone number in phonebook.
Using Caller ID Notification Service
C]]
5
You can notify your phone number to the other party
when dialing. When the other party's phone is the digital
terminal that supports caller ID, your phone number
appears on the other party’s phone.
• Your caller ID is important information, so take great
care to notify it.
1. From the Network Service menu (P189), “Caller ID
notification” ]Select from the following setting
items
Activate/Deactivate caller ID notification
You can display your phone number on the other
party's phone (display) when dialing. To use this
service, you enter the Network Security Code.
Caller ID notification status request
You can check the current settings of Caller ID
Notification.
Using Caller ID Request Service
C]]
6
Caller ID Request Service responds to anonymous callers
by playing the guidance asking them to redial with their
caller IDs notified and disconnects the calls automatically.
1. From the Network Service menu (P189), Caller ID
request” ]Select from the following setting items
Activate caller ID request
You can start using Caller ID Request Service.
Deactivate caller ID request
You can stop using Caller ID Request Service.
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bgc4.png)
195
Network Service
Network Service
Caller ID request status request
You can check the current settings of Caller ID
Request Service.
Using Set Arrival Act
C]]
7
You can activate or cancel the arrival call activation. For
details, refer to “Selecting Arrival Call Act” (See right). You
can view the current status.
1. From the Network Service menu (P189), “Set
arrival act” ]Select from the following setting
items
Activate arrival act
You can start using the response you set in “Arrival
Call Act”.
Deactivate arrival act
You can stop using the response you set in “Arrival
Call Act”.
Arrival act status request
You can check the current settings of Set Arrival Act.
Selecting Arrival Call Act
C]]
8
You can set how to respond to incoming voice calls while
you are on the phone.
• After setting the following arrival act, set “Arrival Call
Act” (See left) to “Activate arrival act” to start using the
set arrival act.
Setting item/Setting at purchase >P227
1. From the Network Service menu (P189), “Arrival
call act” ]Select from the following setting items
Answer
The phone rings. If Voice Mail, Call Waiting Service, or
Call Forwarding Service is activated, the phone
follows each setting.
Voice mail
Connects incoming calls to Voice Mail. Even if Call
Waiting Service is activated, the calls are connected
to Voice Mail.
Call forwarding
Forwards incoming calls to the forwarding phone
number registered. Even if Call Waiting Service or
Voice Mail is activated, the calls are forwarded.
Call rejection
Rejects incoming calls.
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bgc5.png)
196
Network Service
Network Service
Registering Additional Services
C]]
91
When a new service is provided by DoCoMo, you can
store it in the FOMA phone.
1. From the Network Service menu (P189), “Others”
]“Additional service”
• The additional service list will be displayed.
2. I[Edit] ]After editing, press C[Select]
USSD code
Enter the service code (USSD) supplied by DoCoMo.
Service name
Enter any service name. Press I[Edit] to edit.
Using the Submenu of the Additional Service
List Screen
1. From the Additional Service List screen,
M[Menu] ]Select from the following submenu
items
Edit
Edit a service.
Select
The selected service is executed.
Delete 1 item
The selected service is deleted.
Delete all
All the services registered are deleted.
: Not displayed if an unregistered service is selected.
Using Registered Services
1. From the Additional Service List screen, Select a
registered service ]C
Registering Additional Guidance
C]]
92
When you execute services added by “Additional Service”,
you can register reply messages that correspond to the
codes (USSD) returned from the Service Center. The reply
message is displayed when the registered code is
returned as a reply.
1. From the Network Service menu (P189), “Others”
]“Additional guidance”
• The reply message list will be displayed.
2. I[Set] ]After setting, press C[OK]
USSD code
Enter the service code (USSD) supplied by DoCoMo.
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bgc6.png)
197
Network Service
Next page
Network Service
Reply message
Enter a reply message name. Press I[Edit] to edit.
Using the Submenu of the Reply Message
List Screen
1. From the Reply Message List screen, M[Menu]
]Select from the following Submenu items
Set
You can set a reply message.
Delete 1 item
The selected reply message is deleted.
Delete all
The reply messages registered are all deleted.
: Not displayed if an unregistered service is selected.
Using English Guidance
C]]
93
You can set a language for the voice guidance to be
played back for outgoing or incoming calls or network
services.
Available Languages
1. From the Network Service menu (P189), “Others”
]“English guidance” ]Select from the following
setting items
Guidance setting
–Outgoing + Incoming call: You can set languages
of the guidance for outgoing and incoming calls.
Select “Yes” and then select a language.
–Outgoing call: You can set a language of the
guidance only for outgoing calls. Select “Yes” and
then select a language.
LanguageSetting
Japanese
Plays back the guidance in Japanese.
Plays back the guidance in English.
First plays back the guidance in
Japanese and then in English.
First plays back the guidance in
English and then in Japanese.
English
Japanese +
English
English +
Japanese
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bgc7.png)
198
Network Service
Network Service
–Incoming call: You can set a language of the
guidance only for incoming calls. Select “Yes” and
then select a language.
Guidance status request
You can check the current settings of the guidance.
Using Service Dialing Number
C]]
94
You can make a call to the DoCoMo repair counter and
DoCoMo Information Center.
1. From the Network Service menu (P189), “Others”
]“Service dialing number” ]Select from the
following items
Malfunction information
A call is connected to the DoCoMo repair counter.
General information
A call is connected to the DoCoMo Information
Center.
Lost on abroad (Chargeable)
(Abroad) From the information center of DoCoMo, the
call will be arrived.
• This is chargeable.
Malfunction on abroad (Chargeable)
From the network technical operation center, the call
will be arrived.
• This is chargeable.
: Depending on UIM, this menu cannot be displayed.
Using Call Barring
C]]
95
You can block all incoming calls while you are roaming
outside Japan with the FOMA phone.
1. From the Network Service menu (P189), “Others”
]“Call barring” ]Select from the following
setting items
Activate barring of incoming call -roam
–Barring all incoming calls: All incoming calls are
restricted. Enter your Network Security Code.
–Data calls barring: Only incoming video-phone
calls are restricted. Enter your Network Security
Code.
Deactivate barring of incoming call - roam
You can stop using Barring All Incoming When Roam.
Enter your Network Security Code.
Barring of incoming call -roam status request
You can check the settings of Barring All Incoming
When Roam.
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bgc8.png)
199
Data Transmission Available from the
FOMA phone ........................................200
Before Use............................................201
Glossary of Data
Transmission Terms.............................202
Preparation Flow for
Data Transmission ...............................203
AT command ........................................203
Data Transmission
As for data transmissions, refer to Manual for data
transmission (Manual for Data communication.pdf)
in CD-ROM for details. To read this manual, it is
recommended to set up Adobe Reader (Over Ver
6.0). If your personal computer is not installed in this
program yet, you can download it from the latest
homepage of Adobe Systems Incorporation. (Note
that downloading the S/W can be chargeable.) For
details, see the homepage of Adobe Systems
Incorporation.
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bgc9.png)
Data Transmission Available from the
FOMA phone
The data transmission services you can use by connecting
the FOMA phone to a personal computer are classified as
follows: packet transmission, and data transfer (OBEX).
• This FOMA handset does not support 64K data
transmission.
•
This FOMA handset is not applicable with Remote Wakeup.
•
This FOMA handset does not support FAX transmission.
Types of Transmission Available
Packet Transmission
This service charges a transmission fee according to the
amount of data you sent and received. The packet
transmission is suitable for sending and receiving data
only when data transmission is required, with a device
always connected to the network.
Internet connection service for FOMA
It uses an access point which supports FOMA packet
transmission such as “mopera U” and allows data
transmission at a maximum rate of 384kbps in
downloading and 64kbps in uploading.
FOMA L601i allows data transmission overseas using an
access point compatible with W-CDMA or GPRS packet
transmission.
• Note that uploading and downloading a massive
amount of data results in a high amount of
communication fee.
Data Transfer
This service transfers data using infrared rays. This data
transfer service is not chargeable.
By infrared exchange, you can exchange data with
another FOMA phone or a device having the infrared
exchange function such as a personal computer. >P167
Notes for Using Data Transmission
Charges of Internet service provider
To use the internet, you need to pay the charge for the
Internet service provider you use (referred to as “provider”
in this document).
Besides the FOMA service fee, you need to pay the
charge directly to the Internet service provider.
For details on the charges, contact the Internet service
DoCoMo.
You can use the DoCoMo Internet service, “mopera U”.
To use “mopera U”, subscription (charged) is required.
200
Data Transmission
Data Transmission
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bgca.png)
201
Data Transmission
Data Transmission
Next Page
Setting access point (Internet service provider, etc.)
To use the packet transmission, connect to an access
point for packet transmission.
• You cannot connect to the DoPa access point.
• You cannot connect to PHS 64K or 32K data
transmission access point such as PIAFS.
About user authentication for accessing network
User certification (ID and password) may be required at
connection to some access points. In this case, enter your
ID and password on the transmission software (dial-up
network).An ID and a password are given from a connecting
provider or a network administrator of the connecting
access point. Consult your Internet Service Provider or
network administrator for details of the ID and password.
Conditions for packet transmission
To carry out the transmission using the FOMA phone by
connecting to a personal computer, the following
conditions are required. Even when these conditions are
satisfied, however, if the base station is congested or the
radio wave conditions are bad, you may not be able to
carry out transmission.
• The personal computer to be used should support the
FOMA USB cable.
• Within FOMA service area.
• The access point supports IP access of packet
transmission (PDP type) of the FOMA.
Before Use
System Environments
The following system environments are applicable to a
personal computer used for data transmission:
1: This does not support in Windows 98FE.
2: Required memory and hard disk space depends on system
configuration of a PC.
Requirements
• PC-AT compatible PC with CD-
ROM drive.
• USB port (USB Specification
Rev1.1/2.0 compliant)
• Display resolution: 800°X600 dots,
High Color (65,536 colors) or higher
recommended.
Item
PC unit
Hard disk space
Required memory
Windows XP, Windows 2000,
Windows Me, Windows 98SE (All
Japanese editions)
• Windows XP: 128M bytes or more 2
• Windows 2000: 64M bytes or more 2
• Windows Me and Windows 98SE:
32M bytes or more 2
OS 1
Free space of 5M bytes or more 2
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bgcb.png)
202
Data Transmission
Information
• Purchase a dedicated FOMA USB Cable (option). The USB
Cable for personal computer cannot be used because the
shape of the connector differs.
Glossary of Data Transmission Terms
aAPN
An abbreviation for Access Point Name. Used to
identify an Internet service provider or Internet LAN
system you access for packet transmission.
For example, “mopera U” is expressed with character
string “mopera.net” in APN.
acid
An abbreviation for Context Identifier. A registration
number of the APN that is registered in the FOMA
phone in advance for packet transmission.
In the FOMA phones, you can register up to 10 cid
numbers (1 to 10).
aDNS
An abbreviation for Domain Name System, which
converts a name easy-to-understand for human-being.
For example, a domain name “mopera.net” is
converted into an address indicated by a number easy-
to-manage for computer.
aPDP type
An abbreviation for Packet Data Protocol, which
indicates packet transmission. Usually, the type
provider indicates will be selected from PPP access
point and IP access point.This FOMA phone supports
IP access service. For PDP type, consult provider or
network service.
aQoS
An abbreviation for Quality of Service, which indicates
the quality of network service. For the QoS setting of
the FOMA phone, you can specify a communication
rate.
: Connection rates vary depending on
communicating conditions, etc.
aW-TCP
A TCP parameter used to maximize the TCP/IP
transmission capability when carrying out the packet
transmission in the FOMA network. To maximize the
transmission performance of the FOMA phone, you
need to optimize the TCP parameter.
aPC Administrator right
Means the right with which the user can access all
functions of Windows XP and Windows 2000 systems.
A user without an administrator right
cannot install/uninstall transmission setup files (drivers)
and FOMA PC setup software, etc.
Data Transmission
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bgcc.png)
203
Data Transmission
Preparation Flow for Data Transmission
The following outline shows a preparation flow for packet
transmission, and data transfer (OBEX) by connecting a
FOMA phone to a personal computer.
Transmission setup files and FOMA PC setup
software
Attached FOMA L601i CD-ROM contains the transmission
setup files (drivers) and FOMA PC setup software.
• The L601i transmission setup files are software (drivers)
required for packet transmission, and data transfer
using a USB Cable (option).
• The FOMA PC setup software can setup access points
(APN) for packet transmission and dial-up settings
easily.
AT command
AT commands are used to specify and modify the
functions of the FOMA phone on the personal computer.
FOMA phone is in conformity with AT commands.
For details, refer to “Data Transmission” (Manual for Data
communication.pdf) in CD.
Data Transmission
Packet transmission
Data transfer (OBEX)
Infrared rays
Install L600i transfer setup file
onto a personal computer
Specify a connecting access point
Data transfer (OBEX)
Using FOMA PC
setup software
Not using FOMA PC
setup software
Using infrared ray
> P174
Establish connection
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bgcd.png)
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bgce.png)
205
Entering Characters ............................ 206
List of Character Assignment of
Dial Buttons ......................................... 212
Entering Characters
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bgcf.png)
206
Entering Characters
Entering Characters
Entering Characters
About Character Entry Display
FOMA phone has some functions to enter characters for
phonebook or mail.
On the Character Entry display, information on the current
input mode or operation guidance is displayed.
<Character Entry>
1Remaining number of bytes: Remaining number of
characters you can enter is displayed in bytes.
2Operation guidance field: Full-pitch and half-pitch are
displayed.
3Input mode field: Input mode is displayed.
Setting the prediction conversion to enter
character
You can set ON/OFF to predict the conversion candidates
(P207) on entering Hiragana.
• This method is set “ON” at purchase.
1. From the Character Entry display, M[Menu] ]
“Input setting” ]“Prediction ON/OFF”
2. ON/OFF
Switching Input Mode
1. Press I[Mode] on the Character Entry display
(See left)
• Each time you press I[Mode], the input mode
switches.
“” ... You can enter Kanji and Hiragana.
“” ... You can enter Katakana.
“”…You can enter Alphabets.
:You can enter the capital letter.
“”…You can enter Numerals.
Switching Between Full-pitch/Half-pitch
• You cannot switch between full/half-pitch depending on
the display of character entry.
1. Press Aon the Full Entry display (See left)
Half
Full
2
3
Menu Set Mode
Message
Full
1
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bgd0.png)
207
Entering Characters
Entering Characters
Next page
• Each time you press A, the full-pitch and half-pitch
modes switch.
Switching Pictograph/Symbol/Emoticon Mode
• You cannot switch the mode depending on the display
of character entry.
1. Press Ton the Character Entry display (P206)
• Each time you press T, the input mode switches.
“” ... You can enter Pictographs.
“” ... You can enter full-pitch Symbols.
“” ... You can enter half-pitch Symbols.
“” ... You can enter Emoticons.
–I[Continue]: You can enter characters after
selecting the multiple. After selecting them, press
I[Set].
–A: You can change the page. If you select
“KeyGo”, the cursor will be jumped.
Entering Characters
You can enter characters by pressing numeric keys to
which desired characters are assigned.
•To allocate the character on each button, refer to “List of
Character Assignment of Dial Keys” (P212).
Entering Characters in Prediction mode
• You can this method on setting “ ” of Hiragana mode.
1.
Enter characters on the Character Entry display (P206)
•M[KanaA1]: The entered characters are converted
to Katakana or Numerals.
•I[Conv]: The entered characters are converted to
Kanji or other characters.
•C: The entered characters are finalized.
2. Move the cursor to Prediction/Conversion area
using H
.
3. Select a character to convert ]C
Entering Characters in Normal mode
When entering the characters except for “ ” of Hiragana
mode, the conversion is not available. (After Step 2.)
1. On Character Entry display (P206), enter
characters
•M[Katakana/ Numeral] : You can convert the
characters on inputting to Katakana or number.
KanaA1 Set Conv.
Message
Prediction
Prediction Candidate/Area to
convert a candidate
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bgd1.png)
208
Entering Characters
Entering Characters
•C[Set] : You can confirm the character on
inputting.
: In Hiragana mode
2. DI [Convert]
3. Move the cursor by pressing Hto the area of
conversion candidates.
4. Select the character to convert. ]C
aSwitching Capital/ Small letter mode
To switch the capital/ small characters between them,
press *several times. If the character is not
correspond with each one, you cannot convert it.
• You cannot convert the character in numeral mode
(“1(12)”).
aEntering Full pitch/ Half pitch
After entering the character, press Aseveral times. If
the character is not correspond with each one, you
cannot convert it.
• You cannot enter it in English (“a(ab/AB)”) or numeral
(“1(12)”) mode.
aEntering a punctuation
Press *several times.
• You cannot enter it in English (“a(ab/AB)”) or numeral
(“1(12)”) mode.
aEntering Kanji character
Press #/D
• Press Din numeral mode (“1(12)” a line feed).
aEntering a Space
M[Menu] >“Special input” >Select “Space”. In case
of being the cursor at the middle of sentence, press R
to enter a space.
aDeleting a character
Press Qto move the cursor end to delete the
character. Move the cursor to the left of character you
want to delete and press Q. If you press Qfor at
least one second, you can delete all characters.
Using the Submenu on the Character Entry Display
• A few menu cannot be activated depending on the
display of character entry.
1.
From the Character Entry display (P206), M[Menu]
]Select from the following Submenu items.
Common phrases
–Input common phrase: You can select and enter
the registered common phrases.
–Edit common phrase: You can create and register
common phrases and edit registered common
phrases. See step 2 in “Editing Common Phrases”
(P210).
Edit character
You can specify a range to copy/cut and paste
characters. See “Copying/Cutting/Pasting” (P209).
Edit word
You can register words. See Step 2 (P211) of
“Registering Words”.
Kuten code
Return Select Cont.
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bgd2.png)
209
Entering Characters
Entering Characters
Next Page
Quote
–Phonebook: You can access a Phonebook entry
and quote the registered contents. Go to step 3 on
page 60 of “Searching Phonebook”.
–Own number: You can bring up your own number
and quote the registered contents.
Input setting
–Full/Half: You can switch between full-pitch and
half-pitch.
–Upper/Lower :You can switch between upper
case and lower case.
–Prediction ON/OFF: You can activate the
Prediction and Conversion function.
Special input
–Changing line: You can start a new line
–Space: You can enter a space
–Kuten code: You can enter characters using the
Kuten code.
: After converting the English mode “a(ab/AB)”, you can activate
the menu.
Entering Characters Using Kuten Code
You can enter characters or symbols using the four-digit
Kuten code.
• For details, see “Kuten code list” (P258).
1.
From the Character Entry display (P206),
M
[Menu]
]“Special input” ]“Kuten code”
2.
Enter a Kuten code using the numeric buttons ]C
• You can also select characters or symbols using K.
Copying/Cutting/Pasting
You can copy or cut a character string and paste it to
another display/position.
1.
From the Character Entry display (P206), M[Menu]
]
“Edit character”
]
“Copy”/“Cut”
2. Move the cursor to the start position using
K]C
3. Move the cursor to the end position using K]C
4. Display the Character Entry display to which you
want to paste the copied/cut characters ]Move
the cursor to the desired position for pasting using
K.
5. M
[Menu]
]
“Edit character”
]
“Paste”
• Select M[Menu] ]“Edit character” ]“Undo” in
sequence to undo cut or pasted characters.
Information
• If the number of characters which are copied or cut from the
sentence exceeds the limitation, you can paste them after
deleting the characters over limitation.
• When you paste the character after copying or cutting, its type
should be same. For example, you cannot input (half pitch of
English and number) hiragana or Chinese character in screen
to input mail address.
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bgd3.png)
210
Entering Characters
Entering Characters
• If you paste character lines including a line feed in the entry
screen that line feeds cannot be entered, it is replaced by a
blank (one-byte space).
Editing Common Phrases
You can edit registered common phrases or add new
common phrases.
1. From the Character Entry display (P206),
M[Menu] ]“Common phrases” ]“Edit common
phrase”
<Edit Common Phrase>
2. Select Category ]C
• The Select Common phrase display appears.
• If you press Cin common phrase list, you can view
all categories.
• If you register new phrase, select “Original”.
3. Select a common phrase to be changed
]I[Edit] ]Edit/input the common phrase ]C
Using the Submenus of the Edit Common
Phrase Display/ Select Common Phrase
Display / Input Common Phrase Display
1.
From the Edit Common Phrase display (See left)/Select
Common Phrase display (See left)/Input Common
Phrase display (See left),
M
[Menu]
]
Select from the
following Submenu items.
Reset all 1
All common phrases are reset to their defaults.
Delete 1 item 2
A selected/displayed common phrase is deleted.
Reset 1 item 2
A selected/displayed common phrase is reset to its
default.
Category reset 2
All common phrases stored in the category are reset
to their defaults.
Cancel
You can cancel editing of common phrases.
1: Displayed on the submenu of the Edit Common Phrase display.
2: Displayed on the submenu of the Select Common Phrase
display.
Information
• If you activate the menu “Reset all”, the contents of “Original”
will be deleted.
Edit common phrase
Menu Select
2 Greeting
3 Business
4 Private
5 Reply
6 Pictograph idiom
7 Original
1 Internet
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bgd4.png)
211
Entering Characters
Entering Characters
Registering Words
For those words not displayed as the conversion
candidates or words with unusual readings, you can
register them together with their readings. Once
registered, the words are displayed as conversion
candidates when their readings are entered.
1. From the Character Entry display (P206),
M[Menu] ]“Edit word”
• The registered Words List is displayed.
• Select a dictionary and press Cto confirm the
registered words.
2. I[New registration] ]Select the next item to
register ]After registering, I[Register] following
Reading
You can set reading of “Word”.
Word
You can set a word that will be displayed as a
conversion candidate when you enter characters
registered as “Reading”.
Deleting Words
1. From the Registered Words list (See above),
M[Menu] ]“Delete 1 item”/“Delete all” ]“Yes”
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bgd5.png)
212
Entering Characters
Entering Characters
List of Character Assignment of Dial Buttons
You can enter a character by pressing dial button. On pressing one button, you can enter multiple characters as follow the
table. Whenever you press the button on pressing #button at the same time, the character will be changed in reverse order.
1: In full-pitch mode, “ ” or “ ” is displayed only when the character to which “ ” or “ ” can be added is displayed.
2: You can enter a character in full-pitch mode. 3: In half-pitch mode, “ ~ ” is displayed. 4: You can enter a character in half-pitch mode.
5
:
If you set capital mode in “Switching Capital/Small letter mode” (P209), the capital letter will be displayed at first.
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bgd6.png)
213
Network Settings................................. 214
International Roaming Service ........... 214
Using the FOMA Phone Overseas...... 216
Overseas Use
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bgd7.png)
214
Overseas Use
Network Settings
C]]
5
You can connect 3G network setting at purchase. If you use
GSM/GPRS network, set “GSM” or “Automatic” of “Setting
the Network Mode” (P88). If you know the network in your
area, you can select it directly. For details to set the network
refer to “Network Settings (for overseas use)” (P87).
International Roaming Service
Refer to “WORLD SERVICE User’s Guide” for details of
the communications services available while in
international roaming. NTT DoCoMo’s website offers the
downloadable latest version of “WORLD SERVICE User’s
Guide” as well as the latest information about WORLD
SERVICE:
http://www.nttdocomo.co.jp/service/world/
Application for WORLD WING
DoCoMo’s “WORLD WING” international roaming service
is available with no need for separate application.
However, subscribers who signed up for FOMA service on
or before August 31, 2005 and have not applied for
“WORLD WING” need to submit an application to use the
service. >P221
Before Departure
Charging the Battery
Make sure of the voltage available in the country or area of
stay and use the FOMA AC Adapter 01 for overseas and
domestic usage (a conversion plug adapter according to
the place of stay will be required).
Using Voice Mail/Call Forwarding from Overseas
Use of the Voice Mail or Call Forwarding service from
abroad is part of “remote operation” operation and
requires the activation in advance of Remote operation
before your departure. The procedure is:
159A]Follow the voice guidance
1]P
Before departure, make sure that you have the Network
Security Code, which may be required for remote-
accessing the Voice Mail etc.
If you have forgotten your Network Security Code, visit
a DoCoMo Shop or DoCoMo World Counter with an
identification document such as the driver’s license to
make necessary changes.
Overseas Use
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bgd8.png)
215
Overseas Use
Next Page
Overseas Use
Using i-mode/i-mode Mail Overseas
To use i-mode or i-mode mail overseas, you need to set
“International Settings” to “YES”.
aTo change settings in Japan
• No packet transmission fees apply.
“iMenu” ]“Options” ]“International Settings” ]
“YES”
aTo change settings outside Japan
Packet transmission fees apply.
“iMenu” ]“International Settings” ]“YES”
•
If set to “NO”, you can send and receive i-mode mail
messages and view the i Menu only. The default setting
is “NO”.
Some i-mode sites may not be available depending on
the information provider.
Packet transmission fees apply to all types of access
from overseas including transmissions that are free of
charge in Japan.
Japan time applies even if i-mode sites are accessed
from overseas. Be careful when registering entries to or
deleting entries from My Menu at the beginning or end
of a month.
After Arriving at the Destination
Overseas Networks and Services Available
Services marked with “O” in the table above may not
be available depending on the mobile phone carrier
being used or the place of stay.
Visit the DoCoMo website for details about services
available in the individual countries or regions:
http://www.nttdocomo.co.jp/service/world/
Mail Menu i-modeMail Menu i-mode
01/28 [Sat]
See “Network Name” (P89)
to display the network
name on connecting and
to set it.
Network
Icon
Voice
Packet
transmission
(i-mode,
mopera U, etc.)
SMS
Video-
phone
3G
GPRS
GSM
O
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
X
X
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bgd9.png)
Information
• You can set whether to display Japan time together with the
local time on the stand-by display. >P73
Setting Mobile Phone Carrier
The network will be set after searching it automatically if
“Setting the Network Mode” (P88) is set to “Automatic” in
international roaming.
• You can set up beforehand the type of network on
searching by “Setting the Network Mode” (P88).
• If you search the network automatically, you can set the
preferred network by “Registering a Network from the
list” (P88).
• You can select the network manually. Refer to “Selecting
the Network Connection Mode” (P87).
Information
• “Network mode” is set to “Automatic” if “3G”/“GSM”,
“Network connection mode” are searching automatically.
• After you search with “Network mode” set to “Auto” and
“Network selection” set to “Manual”, the mode (“3G”/“GSM”)
the same as the type of network (communication carrier)
selected after the search is sets to “Network mode”.
Using the FOMA Phone Overseas
•
If the other party subscribes to a mobile phone carrier
supporting the FOMA video-phone, you can make a
video-phone call by pressing T.
Making Calls
aCalling from Overseas to Japan
• Check the setting “No prefix” in “Setting Prefix Dial”
(P83).
Press and hold 0for two seconds to display “+”
]81
(Country code for Japan)
]
Other party’s
phone number excluding “0 (zero)” at the beginning of the
area code
]A(T)
Example: When the other party is in one of the 23
wards of Tokyo (area code: 03)
“+”>81> 3> XXXX – XXXX
a
Calling another WORLD WING/WORLD WALKER user
• Make sure that “Auto assist setting” is set to “OFF”.
Press and hold 0for two seconds to display “+”
]81(Country code for Japan) ]Other party’s
phone number excluding “0 (zero)” at the beginning of
the area code ]A(T)
Example: When the other party has a mobile phone
number beginning with (090)
“+”
>
81
>
90
>
XXXX – XXXX
216
Overseas Use
Overseas Use
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bgda.png)
a
Calling a mobile phone or fixed-line phone within the country of stay
Dial the other party’s phone number including the
area code
]
A(T)
a
Calling from the country of stay to a mobile phone or
fixed-line phone in another country (other than Japan)
• Make sure that “Auto assist setting” (P83) is set to
“OFF”
Press and hold 0for at least one second to display
“+”
]
Country code of the other party
]
Other party’s
phone number excluding “0 (zero)” at the beginning of
the area code
]
A
Receiving calls
When a call comes in, A(T)
Having Others Call You While Overseas
aReceiving a call from Japan
Have the other party call you at your regular mobile
phone number.
090
>
XXXX – XXXX/
080
>
XXXX – XXXX
]
CALL
aReceiving a call from a country other than Japan
International access code of the country the call
originates ]81(Country code of Japan)
]Your phone number excluding “0 (zero)” at the
beginning ]CALL
Troubleshooting
Unable to Make or Receive Calls/Always Out of
Service Area/Handset Does Not Turn ON
Possible causes for inability to make or receive calls,
reception level indication permanently being “Out of
service area” or the handset not turning on are:
• Weak radio waves being received or being out of the
service area
• Failure of the local switchboard or base station or
temporary line congestion
• Wrong operation of the handset
• Other
Visit the DoCoMo website for the latest information about
service areas and network interruption:
http://www.nttdocomo.co.jp/service/world/
In addition, make sure of the operation and try the following:
•
If you are indoors, see if the condition is the same outdoors.
•
See if your monthly charges have not exceeded the limit.
• Turn OFF the handset once and back ON.
• Manually select the mobile phone carrier to use.
If the problem persists after the above troubleshooting
procedures have been taken, contact the Network Technical
Support and Operations Center (P219).
217
Overseas Use
Overseas Use
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bgdb.png)
218
Overseas Use
Overseas Use
Limit on Charges
• A limit is set for WORLD WING charges. When we have
recognized that your monthly charges exceeded the
limit, WORLD WING service is suspended until the end
of the month.
• The limit applies to charges including call charges, video-
phone call charges, packet transmission and SMS
transmission charges while in international roaming.
However, the limit does not apply to the international call
forwarding charges or charges for which the billing data
from the overseas carrier used have not been received by
DoCoMo, and the billed amount may exceed the limit. In
that case, the subscriber will still be responsible for the
monthly WORLD WING charges for use until the
suspension.
• When the payment of the monthly charges has been
confirmed, the suspension of WORLD WING service is
lifted (the lifting process may take some time after the
payment has been made). From overseas, the payment
can be made by credit card transaction (one-time
payment only).
• Contact the DoCoMo Information Center for details.
If i-mode is inaccessible
•
If i-mode sites other than “iMenu” is unavailable, first make
“International Settings” (P215). Some sites may not be
available depending on the information provider.
• The i-mode services may not be available depending
on the operator being used.
• Select a mobile phone carrier compatible with packet
transmission.
• For the latest information about overseas carriers
compatible with packet transmission, visit the DoCoMo
website.
• “i-mode” services offered by overseas carriers are not
available.
After Coming Back to Japan
• You have to set “3G” in network mode (P88).
• If the “Network selection” (P87) has been manually set
up overseas, switch to “Auto” or, after searching again,
select “JP DoCoMo-3G”.
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bgdc.png)
Contact (While outside Japan)
If the handset is lost or stolen, etc.
<DoCoMo Information Center> (24-hour service)
aUniversal Number
International Call ID Number for the Universal Number
(see Table 1)
– 800-0120-0151
Local dialing charges may apply for the country or region of stay.
aIf the Universal Number above is not available
International access code for the country of stay (see
Table 2)
– 81-3-5366-3114
Dialing charges for calls to Japan will apply.
Please be aware that you are charged for call fee incurred
after the phone or UIM is lost or stolen. Contact the
Information Center immediately after the loss and follow
procedures to cancel the service.
If the Handset is not Working Properly
<Network Technical Support and Operations Center>
(24-hour service)
aUniversal Number
International Call ID Number for the Universal Number
(see Table 1)
– 800-5931-8600
Local dialing charges may apply for the country or region of stay.
aIf the Universal Number above is not available
International access code for the country of stay
(see Table 2)
– 81-3-6718-1414
Dialing charges for calls to Japan will apply.
The International Call ID Numbers for the Universal Number in Table
1 and international access codes in Table 2 are subject to change.
Major Country Codes
219
Overseas Use
Next Page
Overseas Use
Country/Region
Code
Australia 61
Austria 43
Belgium 32
Brazil 55
Canada 1
China 86
Czech 420
Country/Region
Code
Egypt 20
Fiji 679
Finland 358
France 33
Germany 49
Greece 30
Hong Kong 852
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bgdd.png)
220
Overseas Use
Overseas Use
Visit the WORLD WING website for other country
codes and details.
International Call ID Number for the Universal
Number (Table 1)
Major International Access Codes (Table 2)
Country/Region
Code
Australia 00
900
90
Austria 00
Belgium 00
Brazil 0021
Canada 011
China 00
Columbia 009
Denmark 00
France 00
Germany
Hong Kong
00
001
Country/Region
Code
Luxembourg 00
Malaysia 00
Netherlands
00
00
New Zealand
Norway
Philippines
00
00
Singapore 001
South Korea 001
Spain 00
Sweden
Switzerland
00
00
Taiwan 00
Thailand 001
Ireland 00
Country/Region
Code
Australia 0011
India 00
Indonesia 001
Country/Region
Code
Italy 00
Netherlands 00
UAE 00
UK 011
Country/Region
Code
Argentina 00
USA 011
Ireland 00
Country/Region
Code
UK 00
Israel 014
Italy 00
Country/Region
Code
Indonesia
Italy
62
39
Macao
Malaysia
60
689
Maldives 960
Netherlands 31
687
New Zealand 64
Norway
Peru
47
51
Singapore 65
India 91
Country/Region
Code
South Korea 82
Spain 34
Sweden 46
Switzerland 41
Tahiti 689
Taiwan 886
Thailand 66
Turkey 90
UK 44
USA 1
Philippines
Russia
63
7
Vietnam 84
Hungary 36
New Caledonia
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bgde.png)
221
Overseas Use
Overseas Use
The Universal Number may not be available in some
areas.
The Universal Number can only be used in the
countries included in the table of International Call ID
Number for the Universal Number, as shown above.
When making calls from a hotel, you may be separately
charged for telephone usage fees by the hotel. (You will
be responsible for these fees.) Please check with the
hotel before you make calls.
Applying for WORLD WING
At DoCoMo e-site
aBy i-mode
“iMenu” ]“Charges&Applications” ]“DoCoMo e-site”
aFrom a personal computer
My DoCoMo (https://www.mydocomo.com/)
]
DoCoMo e-site
You need to enter your “Network Security Code” for
application by i-mode.
You need to enter your “My DoCoMo ID” and
“Password” for application from a personal computer.
DoCoMo e-site may not be available for the application
depending on the contracted contents.
Country/Region
Code
Belgium 00
Brazil 0041
0021
0023
Country/Region
Code
Switzerland 00
Sweden 00
Spain 00
Thailand
Taiwan
Turkey
001
Canada 011 002
China 00 00
Czech 00 Luxembourg 00
Denmark 00 Macao 00
00 Malaysia 00
990 Monaco 00
France 00 New Zealand 00
Germany 00 Norway 00
Greece 00 Philippines 00
Hong Kong 001 Poland 00
Hungary
South Korea
00
001
Portugal 00
Russia 810
Singapore 001 Vietnam 00
Philippine
Finland
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bgdf.png)
222
Overseas Use
Overseas Use
By phone
<DoCoMo Information Center>
aFrom DoCoMo mobile phone or PHS
151 (toll-free)
Not accessible from fixed-line phones, etc.
aFrom fixed-line phones, etc.
0120–800–000
Also accessible from a mobile phone or PHS.
Make sure that you dial the correct number.
At DoCoMo Shop
Your local DoCoMo Shop accepts the application.
At the DoCoMo World Counter
Applications accepted even on the day of departure.
aDoCoMo World Counter Narita International Airport No.
1: 4F Central Building, Narita International Terminal 1
aDoCoMo World Counter Narita International Airport No.
2: B1F Main Building, Narita International Terminal 2
aDoCoMo World Counter Kansai International Airport: 4F
Kansai International Airport Terminal Building
aDoCoMo World Counter Central Japan International
Airport: Business Center P@tio, 3F Central Japan
International Airport Terminal Building
Processing the application may take time. Allow
sufficient time for application at the DoCoMo World
Counter.
For business hours, refer to “WORLD SERVICE User’s
Guide”.
How to Use WORLD CALL
aCheck the setting contents of “International Settings”
<How to activate WORLD CALL>
C[Menu] ]or “Settings” ]“Call feature” ]
“International dial” ]“IDD prefix setting”
• Set to use “009130010” for WORLD CALL.
aMaking
Display “+”
>
Country code
>
Area code
>
Other
party’s phone number
>
A
When you call a mobile phone, dial the mobile phone
number after the country code.
When the other party’s area code or mobile phone
number begins with 0, omit the zero when dialing
(this does not apply in some countries/regions).
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bge0.png)
223
Menu list ...............................................224
Pre-installed data .................................248
List of Terms 252
Symbol/Special Character List............253
Pictograph and Emoticon List .............254
Common Phrase List............................256
Kuten Code List....................................258
List of city in World time ......................267
Multiaccess Combination Patterns .....268
Multitask Combination Patterns..........269
Service Available with
FOMA Phones ......................................273
Introduction of Data Link .....................274
Troubleshooting ...................................275
Error Messages ....................................277
Introduction of Options and Related
Equipment ............................................297
Warranty and Maintenance Services ..297
Specific Absorption Rate of the
Mobile Phone .......................................300
Export/Re-export regulations of
Japan and USA.....................................300
Appendix
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bge1.png)
224
Appendix
Menu list
• You can select the function by pressing the button corresponding with the number in a table.
Appendix
i-appli
2 Image display
1 Character size
Pre-installed i-appli only
–
P147
No bookmarks
No screen memos
No URL history
http://
No URL history
No messages
No messages
–
Enable/Disable
URL Address: http://
Small/Standard
ON/OFF
P110
P111
P112
P113
P117
1 iMenu
2 Bookmark
3 Screen memo
4 Last URL
1 Input address
2 URL history
1 MessageR
2 MessageF
7 Check new message
8 i-mode setting
1 Home
2 View
5 Go to location
6 Message
P118
P114
i-mode P109
3 Scroll 1 line/3 lines/5 lines
Menu Item Setting Item (Blue color: Setting at purchase)
Reference
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bge2.png)
225
Appendix
Next Page
Appendix
Menu Item Setting Item (Blue color: Setting at purchase)
Reference
5 Pasted melody
4 Message list disp.
ON/OFF
–
60 seconds/90 seconds/Unlimited
ON/OFF
Mail/MessageR/MessageF (All marked)
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
P119
–
P189
P190
P191
3 Certificates
4 Others
1 Connection timeout
2 i-motion auto play
3 Check new message
4 Check settings
5 Reset settings
6 Reset data
NW Service
1 Voice mail
1 Activate voice mail
2 Set ringing time
3 Deactivate voice mail
4 Voice mail status request
5 Play messages
6 Voice mail setting
7 Check messages
8 Notify missed call
1 line/2 lines
P118
1
Activate missed call notification
2
Deactivate missed call notification
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bge3.png)
226
Appendix
Appendix
Menu Item Setting Item (Blue color: Setting at purchase)
Reference
P194
3 Call forwarding
1 Activate call forwarding
3 Call waiting status request
2 Deactivate call waiting
1 Activate call waiting
2 Call waiting
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
2 Deactivate call forwarding
3 Register the forwarding number
4 Setting at forwarded party busy
5 Call forwarding status request
4 Nuisance call barring
1 Register nuisance caller
2 Delete all entries
3 Delete most recent entry
5 Caller ID notification
1 Activate/Deactivate caller ID notification
2 Caller ID notification status request
6 Caller ID request
P193
–
–P192
–
–
9 Delete voice mail icon
0 Set message alert ringer
–
P191
1 Register fwd number
2 Set ringing time
3
Missed call notification status request
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bge4.png)
227
Appendix
Next Page
Appendix
Menu Item Setting Item (Blue color: Setting at purchase)
Reference
Answer/Voice mail/Call forwarding/Call rejection
Not recorded
Not recorded
–
–
–
–
–
8 Arrival call act
–
–
–
3 Arrival act status request
2 Deactivate arrival act
1 Activate arrival act
9 Others
2 Additional guidance
3 English guidance
4 Service dialing number
5 Call barring
–
–3 Caller ID request status request
7 Set arrival act
–
–
–
1 Activate barring of
incoming call - roam
1 Barring all incoming calls
2 Data calls barring
P198
P197
P196
P195
Outgoing+Incoming call/ Outgoing call/ Incoming call1 Guidance setting
2 Guidance status request
1 Malfunction information
2 General information
3
Lost on abroad (Chargeable)
4
Malfunction on abroad (Chargeable)
1 Activate caller ID request
2 Deactivate caller ID request
1 Additional service
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bge5.png)
228
Appendix
Appendix
*You need to obtain a miniSD memory card separately to use the functions related to the miniSD memory card. >P166
Menu Item Setting Item (Blue color: Setting at purchase)
Reference
None/1 day/2 days/3 days
ON/OFF
Image, Melody (All marked)
ON/OFF
Mail, MessageR, MessageF (All marked)
P145
5 SMS validity term
4 SMS report request
3 Check new message
2 Receive attach file
1 Receive opt. setting
1 Communication
2 Edit
Inbox
Folder created by user
No messages
None
No messages
No messages
P127
P198
P129
P134
P137
P139
P143
P144
Mail
1 Inbox
2 Outbox
3 Unsent message
4 Compose mail
–
–
–
–
–
1 Compose message
P141
2
5 Check new message
6 Receive option
7 Check new SMS
8 Mail setting
–
–
2
Deactivate barring of incoming call - roam
3
Barring of incoming call - roam status request
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bge6.png)
229
Appendix
Next Page
Appendix
Menu Item Setting Item (Blue color: Setting at purchase)
Reference
2 i-motion
>
Small/Standard
1 line/3 lines/5 lines
1 line subject/1 line address/1 line name/2 lines address/2 lines name
ON/OFF
Pasted melody, i appliTo (All marked)
–
–
–
P145
Auto attach: No mark
Signature field: No mark
P146
4 Others
1 Check settings
3 Reset data
2 Reset settings
1 Edit signature
2 Edit quotation
3 View
1 Character size
2 Scroll
3 Mail list display
4 Folder security
5 Melody auto play
6 Pasted data
No data
No data
None
Only preinstalled file
No data
None
Camera, Data transfer, i-mode
Folder created by user
Item,Pre-installed
Camera, Data transfer, i-mode
Pre-installed
Folder created by user
P154
P161
P153
1 My picture
Data box
Inbox, Outbox, Unsent message(All unmarked)
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bge7.png)
230
Appendix
Appendix
*You need to obtain a miniSD memory card separately to use the functions related to the miniSD memory card. >P166
Menu Item Setting Item (Blue color: Setting at purchase)
Reference
Phonebook P57
1 Add to phonebook Not registered P58
P60
Not registered
4 miniSD memory card
P99Multimedia
P101
1 Camera-mode
P1062 Movie-mode
P181Stationery
P182
1 Scheduler
None
None
–
–
Folder created by user
Folder created by user
P164
P168
P186
P185
Not registered
–
Not registered
4 Date counter
3 Date search
2 Memo
3 Melody No data
Only preinstalled file
Data transfer, i-mode
Pre-installed
Schedule type
No alarm/On time/Before 15
mins/Before 30 mins/Before 1
hour/Before 1 day/Before 3
days/ Before 1 week
Alarm
Repeat
None/Private/Anniversary/Trip/
Work/Meeting
2 Search phonebook
Once/Daily/Mon~Fri/Sat~Sun/
Weekly/Monthly/Yearly
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bge8.png)
231
Appendix
Next Page
Appendix
Menu Item Setting Item (Blue color: Setting at purchase)
Reference
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
1. @docomo.ne.jp
2~10. Not registered
Show all data/Group search/Reading search/
Memory No. search/Phone No. search/Domain search
ON/OFF
P60
1 Show all data
2 Group search
3 Reading search
4 Memory No. search
5 Phone No. search
6 Domain search
3 No. of phonebook P63
P63
1 Display data Handset only/UIM only
2 Create domain list
3 Search by
4 Display image
4 Phonebook settings
5 Group settings Group name: Group 1 - Group 30 (Not setting)
P656 Own number –
P171Tools
P172
ON/OFF setting: ON/OFF (Not setting)
ON/OFF
Once/Daily/Mon~ Fri/
Sat~Sun/Except holiday
(ON/OFF setting)
(Duration setting)
1 Alarm
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bge9.png)
232
Appendix
Appendix
*You need to obtain a miniSD memory card separately to use the functions related to the miniSD memory card. >P166
Menu Item Setting Item (Blue color: Setting at purchase)
Reference
4 Calculator
3 IrDA –
–
P174
P173
P172
2 Custom menu 1 Search phonebook, 2Mail, 3i-mode, 4Camera-mode,
5Alarm, 6Select ringtone, 7~10 Not registered
OFF/In 5 mins/In 10 mins/
In 30 mins/In 1 hour/
In 2 hours/In 4 hours/
In 8 hours/In 1 day/In 1 week
(Snooze)
5 Unit converter
P175
P176
P177
P178
1 Currency / / / 1/
2/ 3
Acre/Hectare/Square in/
Square feet/Square yd/
Square miles/Square mm/
Square cm/Square m/
Square km
mm, cm, m, km, Inch, feet,
yard, mile
2 Surface
3 Length
Currency unit
Surface unit
Length unit
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bgea.png)
233
Appendix
Next Page
Appendix
Menu Item Setting Item (Blue color: Setting at purchase)
Reference
P179 267
km/h, meter/sec, mile/h,
feet/sec
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
7 Velocity
6 World time
7 Stop watch
8 miniSD memory card
1 Data box
2 Memory info.
mg, g, kg, ton, ounce, pound,
stone
Celsius/Fahrenheit
Milliliter, Liter, Cubic mm,
Cubic cm, Cubic meter,
Cubic inch, Gallon, Liq.pt,
Liq.oz, Fluid oz, Barrel
4 Weight
5 Temperature
6 Volume
1 Common memory
2 Reserved memory
3 UIM memory
4 miniSD
Weight unit
Temperature unit
Volume unit
Velocity unit
Home setting Tokyo
Choose city
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bgeb.png)
234
Appendix
Appendix
Menu Item Setting Item (Blue color: Setting at purchase)
Reference
MessageR tone
MessageF tone
SMS tone
Message03.mid
Message04.mid
Message05.mid
Flip tone
Power ON/OFF
Key tone
ON/OFF
Sound off/Sound1/Sound 2/
Sound3
ON/OFF
4 Select effect tone
2 Effect tone volume Key tone
Power ON/OFF
Flip tone
Feedback tone
Voice call
Video-phone
Mail tone
SMS tone
MessageF tone
MessageR tone
Mail tone
P68
Ring01.mid3 Select ringtone
Ring02.mid
Message02.mid
Video-phone
Voice call
P68
P67Sound
1 Ring volume Level 0~7 (Level 3)
Level 0~7 (Level 3)
Level 0~7 (Level 3)
Level 0~7 (Level 3)
Level 0~7 (Level 3)
Level 0~7 (Level 3)
Level 0~7 (Level 3)
Level 0~7 (Level 3)
Level 0~7 (Level 3)
Level 0~7 (Level 3)
– P1803 Reset miniSD card
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bgec.png)
235
Appendix
Next Page
Appendix
Menu Item Setting Item (Blue color: Setting at purchase)
Reference
8 Set mute seconds 0 Sec.
P72
Display
1 Main display P72
P67
Time 3 Sec./Duration 1 CycleMail ring duraiton
6 Manner settings Manner mode/Original manner mode
Message
Incoming call
OFF/Pattern 1 (Vibration only)/Pattern
2 (Vibration only)/melody + vibration
OFF/Pattern 1 (Vibration only)/Pattern
2 (Vibration only)/melody + vibration
P70
P71
1 Manner mode –
2 Original manner mode Incoming call sound ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
7 Mail ring duration
Incoming call vib.
Message sound
Message vibration ON/OFF
Key tone
Flip tone
Low battery tone
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
Mail ring ON/OFF
5 Vibration settings
Feedback tone ON/OFF P69
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bged.png)
236
Appendix
Appendix
Menu Item Setting Item (Blue color: Setting at purchase)
Reference
P75
Dial font size
Dial font color
Main display
3 Font
4 Menu style
5 Backlight
Small/Large
Total 16 colors (Orange)
Grid/List
10 seconds/30 seconds/60 seconds/
120 seconds/180 seconds
1 Stand-by display Clock type Analog/Small digital/
Large digital
Outgoing_call_clean
Wallpaper Sub_wind P74
2 Incoming call
3 Outgoing call
Clock font color Total 16 colors (Deep Blue)
3 Outgoing call
2 Sub display
Incoming_call_clean
2 Incoming call
Wallpaper Wind.jpg
Clock font color Total 16 colors (Black)
Clock1 Tokyo
Clock2 London
1 Stand-by display Clock type Do not show/Small digital/
Large digital/Dual clock/
Clock theme 1/Clock theme 2/
Clock theme 3/Clock theme 4
P73
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bgee.png)
237
Appendix
Next Page
Appendix
Menu Item Setting Item (Blue color: Setting at purchase)
Reference
5 Memory reject call
6 Answer mode
2 Call feature
1 Reconnect alarm
ON/OFF
Press send key/Open flip/Press any key
P82
P79
P78
P77
P76
No record
No record
No record
2 Call duration
1 Call history
1 Received calls
2 Redial
3 All calls
Settings
1 Call/Answer
Accept/Reject on list/Reject all calls
Last call, Received calls, Redial calls, All calls (00:00:00)
3 Auto answer
4 Reject/Accept call
P80
P81
Auto answering
Delayed time
(0~120 SEC)
10
ON/OFF
6 Color scheme Space/Lovely/Clear/Clean
P75
Sub display
Keypad
10 seconds/30 seconds/60 seconds/
120 seconds/180 seconds
10 seconds/30 seconds/60 seconds/
120 seconds/180 seconds
High alarm/Low alarm/No alarm
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bgef.png)
238
Appendix
Appendix
Menu Item Setting Item (Blue color: Setting at purchase)
Reference
P86
Image
Image list
Image
Image list
Image
Default image
/Selected image
Not setting
Default image
/Selected image
Not setting
Default image
/Selected image
1 Substitutive image
2 Response hold image
3 On-hold image
3 Video-phone
1 Video-phone settings
2 Image settings
VoiceCall AutoSwitch
Display setting
Sub screen
Send camera image
Sending img. quality
ON/OFF
Both/Other/Me
Me/Other
ON/OFF
Prefer image quality/Normal/Prefer motion quality
Display light Always on/Terminal setting
P85
5 International dial
6 Close setting
2 IDD prefix setting
Auto/OFF
WORLD CALL
009130010
IDD prefix name
IDD prefix code
End the call/Continue (Mute)
1 Auto assist setting
P84
2 Quality alarm
3 Minute reminder
4 Prefix dial P83
Not registeredPREFIX 2~3
PREFIX 1 009130010
ON/OFF
High alarm/Low alarm/No alarm
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bgf0.png)
239
Appendix
Next Page
Appendix
Menu Item Setting Item (Blue color: Setting at purchase)
Reference
3 Security code
Depending on the UIM (FOMA card) setting
Depending on the UIM (FOMA card) setting
P91
3 Change password
2 PIN code request
2 PIN2 code
1 PIN1 code
Depending on the UIM (FOMA card) setting
0000
5 Network
6 Host selection
1 Network selection
2 Network mode
3 Preferred lists
4 Network name display
Auto/Manual
Auto/WCDMA only/GSM only
Depending on user's setting
Display on/Display off
i - mode
P87
P89
7 Security
Power on/Immediate/None P90
1 All lock
3 Daylight saving
Hour indication OFF
/Cuckoo clock/Chime bell
2006.01.01
DD/MM/YYYY / MM/DD/YYYY /
YYYY/MM/DD
ON/OFF
Set date
Date format
2 Set date
P86
Image list Not setting
4 Date & Time
1 Set time 00 : 00 : 00
Set time
12-hour/24-hourTime format
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bgf1.png)
240
Appendix
Appendix
*You need to obtain a miniSD memory card separately to use the functions related to the miniSD memory card. >P166
1 Clear memory
2 Default settings
3 SMS center
4 Reset holiday
2 Reset settings
–
–
DoCoMo
81903101652
SMSC
Address
P93
–
2 Reserved memory
3 UIM memory
4 miniSD
–
–
–
1. 2. English P91
8
9 Others
1 Memory status
1 Common memory –
P92
Menu Item Setting Item (Blue color: Setting at purchase)
Reference
: The setting is registered in FOMA phone and FOMA card (UIM), but if each setting is different, the setting of FOMA card is preferred.
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bgf2.png)
241
Appendix
Next page
Appendix
Default List of the Submenu/Function Menu Items
Video-phone talking screen >P52
Phonebook list screen >P59
Setting ItemsItems / Function Name
X1/X2
High/Medium/Low
ON/OFF
Both/Other/Me
Me/Other
Always on/Terminal setting
Normal/Prefer motion quality/Prefer image quality
Camera settings
(Zoom)
(Brightness)
(Night mode)
Video phone settings
Display setting
Sub screen
Display light
Sending img. Quality
Setting ItemsItems / Function Name
Show all data/Group search/Reading search/Memory No. search/Phone No.
search/Domain search
ON/OFF
Handset only/UIM only
Search phonebook
Phonebook settings
Display image
Display data
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bgf3.png)
242
Appendix
*You need to obtain a miniSD memory card separately to use the functions related to the miniSD memory card. >P166
Still image finder stand-by screen >P102
Setting Items
Super fine/Fine/Normal
OFF/Auto/Always on/When taking
OFF/3/6/9
Auto/Daylight/Cloudy/Incandescent/Fluorescent
ON/OFF
Choose frame/No frame
None/3 sec./5 sec./10 sec.
None/Black & White/Sepia/Negative
Shutter 1/Shutter 2
No restriction/100KB/9KB
(Size)
(Quality)
(Light)
(Multishot)
(Zoom)
(Brightness)
(White balance)
(Night mode)
(Frame shot)
(Auto timer)
(Effect)
(Shutter sound)
(Size restriction)
Auto/50Hz area/60Hz area
(Flicker tuning)
Handset mem./miniSD
(Save to)
1280X1024/640X480/352X288/320X240/176X220/176X144/128X96/
Phonebook
Submenu Items
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bgf4.png)
243
Appendix
Next page
Still Image Display (After taking a multishot) >P102
Moving Image Display >P106
Setting ItemsSubmenu Item
Main display/Sub display
Normal screen/Full screen
1 ~ 9 sec (s) (1)
Set as wallpaper
Slide show settings
View as
Time interval (secs)
Sort by
Setting ItemsSubmenu Item
Super fine/Fine/Normal
OFF/Always on/When recording
Auto/Daylight/ Cloudy/Incandescent/Fluorescent
ON/OFF
None/Black & White/Negative/Sepia
30 secs/1 min/2 mins/5 mins/60 mins/Mail attach
Handset mem./miniSD
Sound+Video/Video only/Sound only
(Quality)
(Light)
(Zoom)
(Brightness)
(White balance)
(Night mode)
(Effect)
(Recording time)
(Save to)
Auto/50Hz area/60Hz area
(Flicker tuning)
(Type)
View by
Name/Date/Type
Simple list/Detailed list/Grid
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bgf5.png)
244
Appendix
Appendix
MessageR/F list screen >P115
Received mail list screen >P131
Sent mail list screen >P134
Setting ItemsItems / Function Name
Sort
Filter
Setting ItemsItems / Function Name
Sort
Filter
Setting ItemsItems / Function Name
Sort
Filter
Subject(asc.)/Subject(desc.)/Address(asc.)/Address(desc.)/Date(asc.)/
Date(desc.)
All/Unread/Read/Protected/Not protected/Pasted/Attached/i-mode mail/
SMS/SMS report
Subject(asc.)/Subject(desc.)/Address(asc.)/Address(desc.)/Date(asc.)/
Date(desc.)
All/Protected/Not protected/Attached/i-mode mail/SMS
Subject(asc.)/Subject(desc.)/Date(asc.)/Date(desc.)
All/Unread/Read/Protected/Not protected/Pasted/Attached
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bgf6.png)
245
Appendix
Next page
Appendix
Unsent mail list screen >P138
Software list screen >P149
Setting ItemsSubmenu Item
Sort
Network setting
i-appli To
Icon info setting
Set/Not set
Show desc setting
Setting ItemsSubmenu Item
Sort
Filter
Subject (asc.)/Subject (desc.)/Address (asc.)/Address (desc.)/Date (asc.)/
Date (desc.)
Name (asc.)/Name (desc.)/Exec time (asc.)/Exec time (desc.)/
Create time (asc.)/Create time (desc.)/S/W size (asc.)/S/W size (desc.)/
Exec count (asc.)/Exec count (desc.)
Show/Don't show
All/Attached/i-mode mail/SMS
Autostart setting
Yes/No/Check every start
Yes/No
Yes/No
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bgf7.png)
246
Appendix
Appendix
Image folder list screen >P155/Image file list screen >P155/Image display screen >P155
Image edit screen >P159
Setting ItemsSubmenu Item
Slide show settings
Normal screen/Full screen
View as
1 sec ~ 9 secs (1 sec)
Time interval (secs)
Name/Date/Type
Simple list/Detailed list/Grid
View by
Sort by
Setting ItemsSubmenu Item
Resizing
Insert
Text
640x480/320x240/160x120/Wallpaper size/Phonebook size/Sub display size
Frame
Element
Clipping
>Text focus (P251)
>Frame (P250)
>Stamp (P251)
1280X960/640X480/320X240/160X120/Wallpaper size/Phonebook size
Effect Black & White/Sepia/Negative/Black & White negative/Color balance/Contrast/
Sharpness/Softness/Mosaic Blur
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bgf8.png)
247
Appendix
Appendix
Moving image folder list screen >P160/i-motion file list screen >P161/Moving image playback screen >P161
Melody folder list screen >P164/Melody file list screen >P164/Melody playback screen >P165
Setting ItemsSubmenu Item
Player settings
Spectrum analy/Dancing notes
Visual effect
Pink/Blue/Violet
Volume
Setting ItemsSubmenu Item
Name/Date/Type
Sort by
None/Current file/All files/Shuffle
Set repeat
Player setting
Spectrum analy/Dancing notes
Visual effect
Pink/Blue/Violet
Player skin
Volume
Sort by
View by
Name/Date/Type
Simple list/Detailed list/Grid
View by Simple list/Detailed list/Grid
OFF~Level 7 (Level3)
Player skin (Color)
OFF~Level 7 (Level3)
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bgf9.png)
248
Appendix
Appendix
Pre-installed data
In stand-by mode
aMain display
aSub-display
Clock_bg1
Flower
Clock_bg2
Red-glare
Clock_bg3
Space
Clock_bg4 Colorful
Wind
Sub_colorful Sub_flower Sub_red glare Sub_space Sub_wind
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bgfa.png)
249
Appendix
Appendix
The screen for receiving / making a call
aMain display
aSub display
Sub_incoming Sub_outgoing
Clean_in_calling
Incoming_call
Outgoing_call
Clean_out_calling
Incoming_call_clean (Gray)
Incoming_call_clear (Purple)
Incoming_call_lovely (Pink)
Outgoing_call_clean (Gray)
Outgoing_call_clear (Purple)
Outgoing_call_lovely (Pink)
Clear_in_calling
Lovely_in_calling
Space_in_calling
Clear_out_calling
Lovely_out_calling
Space_out_calling
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bgfb.png)
250
Appendix
Appendix
Frame
• The frame including of multiple file size can be different to view depending on file size.
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bgfc.png)
251
Appendix
Appendix
Element
• It can be different to view depending on file size.
Text focus
i-motion
Information
• L601i does not support 3D sound.
List of melody
• The copyright of each melody belongs to LG electronic
Japan, Inc.
Melody name
Alarm01 ~ Alarm03
Beautiful Life
Bless You
Blues Mania
Cave No.31
Chicken Soup
Come to Me
Dark Valley
Driving Bayside
Energetic Today
Funny Funky
Green Park
Hide and Seek
High as Moon
Hunter G
Melody name
If I Could
Jasmine
Keep Tension
Message01 ~ Message12
Nothing to Talk
Play Dominoes
Ring01 ~ Ring03
Roll the Dice
Salute for Me
Secret Of Nature
She Smiles
Touch of Light
Violet
Welcome My Friend
What Happened
File name
DiMAGIC eco-motion
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bgfd.png)
252
Appendix
Appendix
List of Terms
a3G:
It is the general term of the 3rd generation mobile
communications system based on the global
standard (IMT-2000) which is defined by ITU
(International Telecommunication Union).
a3GPP:
3GPP stands for 3rd Generation Partnership
Project, and it is the name and the standard of the
organization formed in order to standardize the
3rd generation mobile communications system.
aGSM:
GSM stands for Global System for Mobile
Communications, and it is one of the radio-
communications systems. It is the 2nd generation
mobile communications system whose standard
has been unified in Europe and which has spread
globally through out the world.
aGPRS:
GPRS stands for General Packet Radio Service,
and it is a packet communication service with
maximum of 115kbps transmission speed which
can be used in the GSM network.
aIrDA:
IrDA stands for Infrared Data Association, and it is
the name of the industry organization which
establishes the specification of the data
communications in Infrared rays and its standard.
aSSL:
SSL stands for Secure Sockets Layer, and it is the
data communication system which enciphers data
and communicates safely.
aUSB:
USB stands for Universal Serial Bus, and it is the
standard for connecting peripheral equipment with a
personal computer.
aRoaming:
Roaming uses the networks of the carriers tied up
with DoCoMo for communications out of DoCoMo’s
service area. When you use the phone
overseas, the services of DoCoMo, such as phone
calls and i-mode communications, can be received
by using the global roaming service.
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bgfe.png)
253
Appendix
Next page
Appendix
Symbol/Special Character List
aFull-pitch symbol
Special Character
Information
• Special characters might not be correctly displayed if they are sent to mobile phones which do not support i-mode or personal
computers.
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bgff.png)
254
Appendix
Appendix
aHalf-pitch symbol
Pictograph and Emoticon List
Pictograph List
aPictograph1
aPictograph2
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg100.png)
255
Appendix
Appendix
Emoticon List
Information
• For the method of entering pictographs and emoticons, see “Switching Pictograph/Symbol/Emoticon” (P207).
Category
Happy
Cry
Chill
Expressions Category
Angry
Sweat
Surprise
Expressions Category
Embarrass
Greeting
Other
Expressions
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg101.png)
256
Appendix
Appendix
Common Phrase List
Category
Internet folder
Greeting folder
Phrase
@docomo.ne.jp
.ne.jp
.co.jp
.com
.or.jp
.go.jp
.ac.jp
http://
www.
.html
Category
Greeting folder
Business folder
Private folder
Phrase
Good morning
Good night
Good afternoon
Good evening
How are you?
Long time no see
Thank you for the other day.
I'm going
I'm back
Happy birthday!
I have always been indebted.
Thank you for your consideration.
I'm sorry
I'm so sorry seriously.
Give me as soon as possible.
Could you please wait for a second?
I'll contact you later on.
I'll send e-mail to you.
Please check the fax.
I'm late because the train is delayed.
Let's go out.
What about going out for drinking?
I'm late
I'll change
Stop
I'll go at first
.
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg102.png)
257
Appendix
Appendix
Category
Private folder
Reply folder
Pictograph
idiom folder
Phrase
I'm back now
It's time up
How can I do?
Where are you?
Thank you!
bye-bye!
OK
Not good
Thank you
I'm sorry
Wait for a moment
Let's contact later
I can't do it now
I got it!!
Category
Pictograph
idiom folder
Original folder
Phrase
You can enter your own phrase from 1 to 0.
(Glad)
(OK)
(Lovely)
(Hello)
(Waiting a call)
(Happy)
(Angry)
(Christmas)
(Return)
( ? )
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg103.png)
Kuten Code List
To enter a Kuten Code, first enter the three-digit number for “Kuten digits 1 to 3” and enter the one-digit number for
“Kuten digit 4”
• Some characters in Kuten Code List may appear different from those on the display.
258
Appendix
Appendix
Kuten
digit
1 to 3
Kuten digit 4 Kuten digit 4 Kuten digit 4
Kuten
digit
1 to 3
Kuten
digit
1 to 3
![](/img.php?id=687972&img=bg104.png)
259
Appendix
Next Page
Appendix
Kuten
digit
1 to 3
Kuten digit 4 Kuten digit 4 Kuten digit 4
Kuten
digit
1 to 3
Kuten
digit
1 to 3